Electrical Specification

MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT TABLE OF CONTENTS
REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260539 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263213 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR
263323 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER GENERAL
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SHAKER Consultancy Group

Project No. 20075
Rev: 0 Date: August., 2021 260000 - Page 1 of 1
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. General provisions applicable to Division 26 work and other Sections of the

Specification that refer to this Section.
2. Supporting devices for electrical components.
3. Electrical identification.
4. Covers, brackets and supports.
5. Concrete equipment bases.
6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
7. Touchup painting.
B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on the
Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all associated ancillary work,
support work and builder's work required to achieve full functionality as per the design
intent.
C. The scope of electrical works shall include, but shall not be necessarily limited to the
following:
1. Power Service and Distribution consisting of:
a. Low voltage distribution network:
1) Distribution panels.
2) Final branch circuit panelboards
3) Automatic transfer switches.
4) Motor control centers / panels.
5) Feeders, sub-feeders and wires.
6) Conduits, cable trays, wireways and supporting systems.
b. Underground ducts and raceways.

c. Lighting and small power installations:
1) Functional lighting.
2) Emergency lighting and exit signs
3) Lighting control system.
4) Emergency Central for emergency lighting and exit signs
5) Wiring devices & miscellaneous equipment.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
d. Other electrical systems:
1) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS),

2) Earthing & Lightning protection systems.
e. Vertical Transportation systems consisting of :
1) Passenger Elevators.
2) Firefighter Elevators.
3) Dual purpose passenger and service “swing” Elevators.
D. The following shall be excluded from Contractor's Scope of Work, as further described in
the Contract Documents:
1. Incoming LV cables termination to their upstream supplying main distribution

boards.
2. Power supply for Retail and F&B units within the buildings.
3. Power supply to parking jet fans.
4. Landscape lighting.
5. Supply of lighting fixtures (except for Handrail Lighting and Elevators Car lighting,
where their supply shall be part of Contractor's scope of work, as further described in
the Architectural and Electrical Contract Documents). All lighting fixtures
installation, testing & commissioning shall be part of Contractor's scope of work.
6. Smart energy meters components.
1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the local
codes of practice, local power authority regulations and Requirements for Electrical
Installations – IET Wiring Regulations (BS 7671) as published by the Institution of
Engineering and Technology and IEC Standards and National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) requirements for emergency electrical systems serving Life Safety Systems.
B. Provisions for Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs) within the wet areas shall conform
to the requirements of the Local Egyptian Code.
C. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which

material or construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the
Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in writing. Consequent to Engineer's
approval, supply the materials and perform the work as though called for to minimum code
standards.
D. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be manufactured and
installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following or other equal
and approved standards:
1. IEC: The International Electro-Technical Commission.

2. ISO: The International Standardization Organization.
3. CENELEC: European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization.
4. IET: The Institution of Engineering and Technology.
5. BS: British Standards.
6. CIE: International Commission of Illumination.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. In case of contradiction between enforced and relevant local regulations and International
Standards, the most stringent requirements shall prevail.
1.4 POWER SUPPLY
A. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:
1. Low voltage: 380 V, 3 phase, 5 wire, solidly earthed neutral.

2. Frequency: 50 Hz.
B. Distribution systems shall be supplied or derived from the voltage system previously
described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
1.5 MOTORS AND OTHER ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT
A. All electrical work from and including motor control centers / panels to motors and other
electrically operated equipment, which is included in Division 26 Section "Motor Control
Centers", form part of the Electrical Work.
B. Power supply to motors and other electrically operated equipment, which are not connected
to a motor control center / panels, is included in the Electrical Work and comprises power
supply to terminal box on equipment or nearby disconnecting or starting device, and
includes the disconnecting device, if individually provided, including the starting device or
combination starter.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment Spaces and Rooms: Verify that dimensions, structure, ventilating and cooling
arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms are suitable for
installation, operation and maintenance of proposed equipment. Note any discrepancies on
the shop and construction drawings.
B. Equipment shall be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously described,
unless otherwise specified. Special provisions shall be made for equipment sensitive to
power supply frequency and voltage variations and for equipment operated at other
voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.
1.7 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Climatic Conditions at Project’s Site:
1. Altitude: (consultant to add according to the project conditions)

2. Maximum ambient temperature: (consultant to add change according to the project
conditions)
3. Minimum ambient temperature: (consultant to add change according to the project
conditions)
4. Resultant relative humidity at summer peak condition: (consultant to add change
according to the project conditions)

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental conditions specified

here below encountered at the installed location without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of operating capability, unless otherwise specified. For all devices, the
Contractor shall provide the necessary housings or enclosures to ensure proper equipment
operation and performance under the following harsh environments.
1. Interior Environment: System components installed in non-temperature-controlled

interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of
15 to 40 deg C dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
2. Exterior Environment, Under Direct Sunlight: System components installed in
locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient
conditions of 5 to 50 deg C dry bulb and 10 to 100 percent relative humidity,
condensing, when exposed to winds up to 160 km/h.
3. Exterior Environment, Under Shade: System components installed in locations
exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of
15 to 40 deg C dry bulb and 10 to 100 percent relative humidity, condensing, when
exposed to winds up to 160 km/h.
C. All electrical equipment including transformers, LV switchgears, cables, relays, lighting

fixtures, motors, etc. shall be designed or derated for continuous and trouble free trouble
service under the following climatic conditions:
1. Interior Environment – where installed indoors, according to their application/

location of installation.
2. Exterior Environment – where installed outdoors.
D. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required for particular
equipment, they are described in the specification of the equipment concerned.
E. Equipment, apparatus, material accessories installed outdoors shall be corrosion and salinity
proof. UV stabilized requirement shall be applied for outdoor installations and their surface
finish and due certification shall be provided by manufacturer as necessary.
1.8 DRAWINGS
A. Equipment locations shown on the Drawings indicate approximate locations and general
layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions,
weights, mounting methods and accessories, where relevant, shall be shown on Contractor's
shop and construction drawings.
B. Symbols: In order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the
Drawings, the symbols used for various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted
devices, take up more space on the Drawings than the device does on the wall. Because of
drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being indicative rather than exact
physical locations of the devices. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for
convenience of operation and the proper usage of the wall space rather than to coincide with
the scaled locations of the symbols. In locating the outlets, follow the criteria provided on
detail Drawings where provided, and coordinate with furniture. Do not scale from design
Drawings.
C. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings shall be used as a guide only to defining basic
positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of
routing of circuits shall be shown on the Contractor's shop and construction drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Wiring layouts shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work are
shown for convenience and reference only.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction
drawings and other information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.
B. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed product data such as model no., all relevant
ratings, country of manufacture, interface details as necessary, covers and supports.
C. Calculations: Submit for approval the manufacturer/supplier calculations for the following
systems, prior to ordering/manufacturing the material:
1. Indoor and outdoor lighting distribution, with necessary supporting documents and
photometric data of the lighting fixtures proposed and approved by the Contractor.
2. Circuit breakers selectivity and discrimination calculation study based on IEC
Standards for a selective and discriminated distribution scheme up to the short circuit
level at the point of the installation, in close consistent coordination with
infrastructure Contractor.
3. Voltage drop and short circuit calculations after verification of cable and breaker
sizes, where the maximum voltage drop values between the secondary winding of
distribution transformers and any load point shall not be greater than the values
stipulated in IEC 60364-5-52 (BS 7671). Except for life safety loads, where the
maximum accumulative voltage drop values shall not exceed 5%.
4. Battery bank calculations for UPS and Emergency Central Battery system to fulfill
the specification requirements provided for the specific equipment.
5. Rating / derating calculations for the specified equipment.
6. Lightning risk assessment and energy coordination studies for surge protection.
7. Harmonic analysis.
8. Earthing.
9. Relay settings.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings:
1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electrical equipment, as

applicable.
2. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design requirements are
understood by indicating all equipment and material proposed to be supplied and
installed and by detailing fabrication and installation methods proposed to be used.
Shop and construction drawings shall clearly state the name and location of the work,
the names of Engineer and Contractor, submission date, cross-references to the
Drawings and Specification and the specific reference number, location, service and
function of each item.
3. Shop and construction drawings shall be submitted at a scale of 1:50 for general
layout plans, and 1:10, or 1:20 as approved by the Engineer for sections, details,
elevations, congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall include but not be limited to the
following:
a. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades concerned,

showing sleeves and openings for passage through floor structure.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing

locations of cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other critical locations
c. Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to clearances,
access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and elevation of pipes, ducts,
conduits, etc.
d. Plans, sections and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate compliance with
Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance, movement, installation, etc.
e. Coordinated RCP plans demonstrating all MEP installations (Lighting,
mechanical, security, fire alarm detectors, etc.) in false ceilings.
4. Single Line Diagrams: Detailed single line diagrams and control schematics clearly
indicating all equipment ratings, frame sizes, cable sizes, connected loads, diversified
loads nomenclature/identification number shall be submitted for the Engineer’s
approval.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements, and arrange for certification by manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized
representative.
F. Test reports shall be signed by the persons performing the tests and the witnesses to the tests
and include, but not be limited to, the following data.
1. Date of test.
2. Description of equipment tested.
3. Description of test.
4. Test results.
5. Conclusions and recommendations.
6. Identification of test equipment.
G. Include copies of the final approved test reports in the maintenance manuals.
H. Electrical installation shall be fully rated for the power source and load characteristics as
also for the fault conditions expected and protection selectively coordinated for
discrimination up to the short circuit level at the points, considering the different
manufacturers products used in the system.
I. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original catalogues

or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and operating criteria of all
equipment and materials, together with other information necessary to satisfy Engineer that
proposed equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.
J. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials, including all items for
which choice of manufacturer is at own discretion, shall be submitted for approval.
Common equipment manufacturer for the same system shall be used across Package.
K. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for the project shall be
assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized assembler. Submit the necessary
documents to substantiate the above including the assembler staff training, quality control,
etc. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any local assembler if the information
submitted is not sufficient. The Engineer's rejection in that respect is final and not subject to
discussion.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
L. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and
reports for equipment and devices. Complete test results shall be submitted in clearly
identified and organised booklets, indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of
tests, type of tests, descriptions and procedures. Include in the test reports the Quality
Assurance Certification, the standards to which the equipment comply, and the standards to
which the equipment was tested.
M. Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment shall comply with the relevant
standards recommendations and shall be witnessed by Engineer, where required in the
relevant Specifications Section. If the manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not complying
with the standards, then independent laboratory tests shall be carried out on equipment in
accordance with the Specification and the Standards, and as required by Engineer. The
Engineer's requirements in that respect are final and not subject to discussion.
N. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of spare parts to be
provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's
unit price including packaging and delivery to site
O. Tools and Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemised schedules of tools and
instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
P. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all equipment
and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and fixing methods of
each label indicating its application.
Q. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of
equipment for which samples cannot be submitted shall be demonstrated in existing
installations or by manufacturer's information, test certificates and reports.
R. As-Built (Record) Drawings: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit Record Drawings

certified by the Engineer on installed electrical systems, in accordance with requirements of
the Specification, Division 01. The As-Built (Record) Drawings, where applicable, shall
include data on existing works. The As-Built Records shall be made progressively as the
Work proceeds.
S. Submit CVs of electrical Engineers, electrical personnel, and quality personnel, for
Engineer’s review and approval.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.
B. Installations shall be carried out by qualified personnel.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with Infrastructure Contractor and other involved packages Contractors as

deemed necessary to ensure the proper and complete functionality of the building's systems
and networks.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in the building.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access
Doors and Frames." The locations of access panels shall be coordinated and proposed to
ensure that all electrical equipment is accessible within “hand-reach” through the access
provided, whereby the locations of access panels shall be shown on the coordinated RCP
plans that shall be demonstrating all MEP installations in false ceiling.
E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
F. Where acoustical ceilings and similar finishes will conceal electrical identification markings
and devices, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
G. Locations of all ceiling lighting fixtures, fire alarm detectors, emergency lighting, CCTV
cameras, etc. shall be coordinated with false ceiling subcontractor and other mechanical
services outlets, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and technical and functional
requirements.
1.12 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work
prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be
available, submit alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics

where required are compatible with the requirements of the Local Power Authority or other
Authorities having jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any
modifications necessary to comply with the Local Power Authority's requirements.
C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment shall be the latest standard product of the

manufacturer. Component parts shall be the product of a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise approved and provided that components made by other manufacturers are of a
standard design and are interchangeable.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification does not

necessarily constitute approval of their standard products as equal to those specified.
Ascertain that listed manufacturers are able to supply equipment and material in conformity
with the Specification.
E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally shall be supplied in complete factory assembled

units ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly necessary for transportation or other

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
purposes shall be arranged to limit site work to simple re- assembly and inter-wiring of
control and power cabling.
F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be stored in an approved location,

under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and
humidity shall be kept in climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed over.
G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective
equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for
repair or replacement.
H. Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment or parts
thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials and workmanship for the period
stated in the Specification, starting at substantial completion. Assign the benefits of such
warranty to the Employer.
I. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare parts required
by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
J. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets of
tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable means of
identifying, storing and securing same.
K. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate
duty, service or function, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Labels shall be laminated anodized
aluminum discs with black surface and white core with incised lettering in [language].
Alternative methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix labels with non-
corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent surfaces or as approved by
Engineer.
L. Systems used before substantial completion shall have all consumable elements, such as
lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new, within 7 days prior to the date of
substantial completion.
M. All panels and electrical boards shall have designs permitting easy access of internal
components for maintenance and replacement without disturbing other components. All
equipment shall be designed for easy and simple operation.
N. Contractor shall be responsible to define the necessary power supplies, taking into account
the installed load of chosen equipment and final condition of installation, as well as any
other considerations as to allow the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 14-mm diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of 50-mm centers in webs.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with 14-mm diameter holes at a maximum of 200-mm centers in at
least one surface.
1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and angles.
2. Fittings and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items
may be stainless steel.
E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded
C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or
click-type hangers.
F. Pipe Sleeves: Refer to Specifications section 260533.
G. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs
have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
H. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
I. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
1. Emaar approval is a must prior proceeding. Manufacturer / Supplier shall obtain

approval from Emaar for all proposed materials. Contractor is required to carry out
all required coordination with Emaar in order to ensure that all proposed
Manufacturers / materials are approved from Emaar prior to ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.
2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category.
Use colors prescribed by these Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size to meet IEC Standards.
C. Type of raceway and cable labels shall be one of the following subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
1. Type: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-coded,

acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Type: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with a
clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
3. Color: Black letters on orange background.
4. Legend: Indicates voltage.
D. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl
tape, not less than 25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape

with the following features:
1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
G. Equipment Nameplates: Non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and firmly fixed
to equipment at factory. Nameplates shall indicate name and address of manufacturer,
model, serial number, basic characteristics and ratings of equipment and shall include
elementary diagrams etc., all in accordance with the Standards. Equipment shall also be
further identified after location at site, indicating the nomenclature number as per approval.
As a general practice, the identification labels shall be suitably located on adjoining surface
or on separate support and not on the electrical device which could be removed and
replaced.
H. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
I. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1.6-mm minimum thickness for signs
up to 129 sq. cm and 3.2-mm minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black
letters on white background.
J. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs,

punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the
application.
K. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-

acetate butyrate signs with 1-mm, galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size
appropriate to the application. 6-mm grommets in corners for mounting.
L. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.3 COVERS FOR TRENCHES
A. Covers in electrical rooms and the like, unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings, shall be flanged checkered steel plates with angle or channel- section frames,
suitably reinforced to support anticipated loads, and finished with zinc chromate primer and
two coats gray enamel.
2.4 BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, RAILS AND TRACKS
A. Brackets, supports, rails and tracks for supporting electrical installations shall be galvanized
steel, fixed with expansion bolts of approved size and material. Plastic inserts and lead
anchors are not acceptable unless approved for specific light duty installations.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Covers shall be suitably dimensioned and matched to provide perfect level surface with
flush-mounted lifting handles. Cut edges of trench covers shall be provided with neoprene
trims to avoid sharp edges. Cable trench covers shall be supported with additional members
at wide spaces.
C. All supports used in external locations, cable trenches and manholes shall be provided with
an additional coat of U.V resistant paint, of a color to Engineer’s approval.
D. All fixing hardware used in non-air-conditioned spaces, shall be made of non-corrosive

material.
2.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."
B. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Reinforced concrete, as approved by Engineer after

submission of design calculations. Dimensions, levels and surface finishes shall be suitable
for equipment installed, as shown on the Drawings or in accordance with approved shop and
construction drawings.
C. Alternatively, and where concrete bases are not possible, equipment can be anchored to
steel-channel sills 100 mm high (min and as necessary), arranged and sized according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and grout sills
flush with equipment mounting surface.
2.6 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS AND VENTILATORS
A. Any major items of electrical equipment which are liable to suffer or be affected in the long
term, from internal condensation due to atmospheric or load variations shall be equipped
with heating devices suitable for electrical operation at 220V A.C 50 Hz, single phase of
sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature by 5 deg. C.
B. A humidistat shall be included in the heater circuit. The protected electrical apparatus shall
be designed such that the maximum permitted rise in temperature is not exceeded if the
heaters are energized while the apparatus is in operation. Where fitted, a suitable terminal
box and control switch, with indicating lamp shall be provided and mounted in a convenient
accessible position.
C. All such equipment, whether fitted with a heating device or not, shall be provided with
suitable drainage and shall be free from pockets in which moisture can collect.
2.7 ELECTRICAL CONTROL LOCATIONS
A. Equipment may be electrically controlled from a number of different control points as

specified in the appropriate sections of the Specification. The control positions shall be
designated as follows:
1. Local Control: Located within or adjacent to the item of plant to facilitate

maintenance, inspection and emergency operation.
2. Remote Control: Located at the BMS control room where specified items of Plant are
monitored and controlled by direct wire connection.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.8 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment

finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Installations Generally:
1. Carry out Electrical Work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and
Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to
provide safe and protected systems with equipment readily accessible for operation,
maintenance and repair.
2. Installations shall be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and
coordinated with all other work.
3. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or
recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.
B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. Generally,
all cabling, power conductor routing shall be located above any piping, unless specifically
approved otherwise.
3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel

system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least three or 90-kg concentrated load, whichever is more stringent.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical
components. shall include all necessary secondary support systems for erection of electrical
installation mounted at height.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies
and for securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or

clamps.
F. Install 6-mm- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 600 mm from the box.
J. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
K. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and
fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves
during erection of concrete and masonry walls.
L. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid
masonry units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided
with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of
its proof-test load.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A. Comply with BS 822 and IEC 60034-8.
B. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
C. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical
identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
E. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:
1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive

marking tape. Make each color band 50-mm wide, completely encircling conduit,
and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 15-m
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 8-m maximum intervals in congested
areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Security system :Blue and yellow
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
F. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used
for voltage and phase identification.
G. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power
and communication lines. Locate 150 to 200 mm below finished grade. If width of multiple
lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 400 mm, overall,
use a single line marker.
H. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where needed to ensure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved
plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
I. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background

with minimum 9-mm- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations.
J. Labels: Labels shall be provided inside the boxes or cubicles to describe the functions of the
various items of equipment. Where the cubicle is divided into compartments each door
shall have an external label to identify the compartment.
3.5 FIRE STOPPING

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."
3.6 CABLE SEGREGATION AND FIRE RISK
A. All cables shall be routed and connections designed to reduce fire risk, outage and damage
to other plant and buildings.
B. Cables shall be segregated to reduce damage if fire occurs and avoid faulty operation of
equipment due to induced voltages as follows:
1. Control and protection cables shall be separated from power cables to avoid damage
in the event of a power cable fault.
2. Telephone, communication, analogue and digital system cables shall not be at any
point less than 300 mm away from power cables, unless otherwise required by
relevant Standards and Regulations.
3. All cable holes through walls and floors shall be sealed with approved silicone foam
fire seals or other approved materials after the cables have been installed and the cost
thereof is deemed to be included in the Contract.
C. Each cable shall be run in one continuous length, straight through joints will not be
permitted unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing.
D. Wherever cables/wires are routed with a likelihood of these being exposed to high
temperature, they shall be provided with additional “heat resistant” sleeves to Engineer’s
approval.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie
locations, unless otherwise indicated. For concrete and reinforcement characteristics, refer
to Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.8 SUPPORT FRAMES FOR SWITCHGEAR
A. Support frames for switchgear located over cable trenches, where shown on the Drawings or
required by equipment design, shall be installed prior to pouring concrete.
3.9 HOLES AND ANCHORS
A. Drilling for anchor bolts shall be carried out using appropriate electric drills and in approved
positions.
B. Holes and chases in in situ concrete shall be cast in. Do not cut hardened concrete or drill
holes larger than 10-mm diameter without prior approval.
C. Holes and Chases in Pre-cast Concrete: do not cut or drill pre-cast concrete without prior
approval.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Holes in Structural Steelwork: Do not cut or drill structural steelwork without prior
approval.
E. Holes and chases in masonry must not exceed:
1. Size of holes: 300-mm square.

2. Depth of vertical chases: 1/3 wall thickness or, in cavity walls, 1/3 leaf thickness.
3. Depth of horizontal chases: 1/6 wall or leaf thickness.
F. Cutting Masonry:
1. Ensure mortar is fully set before commencing.

2. Cut carefully and neatly, avoiding spalling, cracking or other damage to surrounding
structure.
3. Keep holes to smallest practicable size and do not exceed specified dimensions.
4. Cut chases in straight lines and horizontally and vertically only; do not set back to
back; offset by a distance not less than wall thickness.
G. Preformed Holes in Masonry: Submit proposals for bridging over holes for ducts etc. which
exceed 450-mm width.
3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Before start of work, re-confirm from existing “As-builts” the
locations of existing services in the area and obtain approval for work notification. Perform
cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been
disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades
involved.
3.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Install equipment only in dust-free environment and maintain the condition with protective
covering as necessary. If air-conditioning is required, ensure it is available by installation
time. In general, ensure that locations are complete and ready to receive equipment.
B. Ensure that rooms where equipment are installed are provided with lockable doors.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. For the specific field quality control tests for each type of electrical systems, refer to the
relevant specification section.
B. General Requirements:
1. Provide labor, materials, temporary wiring, testing equipment, load banks, technical
supervision and services, and perform operations required for testing of electrical

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
equipment and installations and related work as specified herein and as specified in
the relevant specification section.
2. Preliminary testing and visual inspections shall be conducted prior to acceptance and
operational tests to avoid delays.
3. Electrical acceptance tests shall be conducted to assure that electrical materials, and
their installations are in accordance with contract documents, regulatory agencies,
applicable codes and standards listed herein, and that they may be energized.
4. Operational tests shall be conducted to assure capability of equipment and systems to
perform as specified and designed.
5. Testing and testing equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference
specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the applicable electrical

code and standards.
b. Comply with latest edition of relevant IEC/S standards for equipment testings.
IEC 60346 – 6 – 61 (Initial Verification)
c. Comply with applicable provisions of IET wiring regulations.
6. Contractor shall furnish testing equipment as required. Testing equipment, meters and
instruments shall have been properly calibrated and certified prior to testing and shall
be in satisfactory condition to perform its functions.
7. All products installed to be certified by manufacturers or authorized representative as
“fit for energisation”.
8. Contractor shall provide an appropriate and stable source of electrical power to the
test locations.
9. Electrical equipment and installation shall meet acceptance and operational tests.
Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular
system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Employer and the
Engineer. Any damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged
materials replaced, to the satisfaction of the Employer and the Engineer.
10. All tests shall be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer in the presence of
manufacturer's technical representatives be present during the testing. These
representatives shall include:
a. Electrical subcontractor who is thoroughly familiar with the project as to its

intent, what equipment has been provided and how it is supposed to operate.
b. Supplier of equipment particularly where packaged equipment has been
provided.
c. Manufacturer's representative who is thoroughly familiar with the operation of
the equipment.
11. The operation of the electrical installation by the Employer and Engineer does not
constitute an acceptance of the electrical installations.
12. Final acceptance will depend on Contractor's demonstration of compliance with
contract documents, completion of adjustments as specified and required, and
submission of required documentation and certification of approval by governing
authorities.
C. Scheduling:
1. Scheduling of tests shall be as approved by the Employer and Engineer.

2. Schedule tests so that equipment can be energized immediately after completing the
tests and approval of the reports.
3. Notify the Employer and Engineer two (2) weeks prior to testing.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Preparation:
1. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the

completeness of the work required under this Section.
2. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the electrical work with the work of
related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
3. Testing of outdoor equipment shall not be performed during inclement weather.
Ground resistance tests on direct buried ground conductors or rods shall not be
performed within 48 hours after rainfall.
4. Megger and high potential testing shall not be performed during periods of high
relative humidity. A guard shall be stationed at each location where exposed cables,
buswork, connections or other components exist during megger and high potential
testing.
5. Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing. Vacuum the interiors of
cubicles and remove foreign material. Insulators, bushings and bus supports shall be
wiped clean with a lint free cloth.
6. Preliminary tests and visual inspections of the electrical installation including
verification checks of factory wiring shall be conducted prior to electrical acceptance
and operational tests to avoid delays, and to assure that equipment and installations
are free of faulty conditions prior to the application of test voltages.
7. Where the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon other
equipment, systems and/or controls for proper operation, functioning and
performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system
under test.
8. Test current transformers for continuity and proper polarity.
9. Test potential transformers for continuity and absence of short circuits.
10. Set protective devices in accordance with the approved coordination study.
11. Verify that shipping devices and restraints have been removed.
12. Check for proper interconnection and tightness at connections of shipping sections.
E. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.
3. Energy metering components.
4. Concrete bases.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
F. Ensure that all warning signs and signages as dictated by the regulations are in place and the
room doors locked, once equipment is energized.
G. Field tests shall, in addition to those specified by regulation, specifically include the
following:
1. Insulation resistance tests for all parts of the electrical system, irrespective of voltage
class and shall include individual measurement between the various live conductors
as also between the individual live conductors and ground.
2. Earthing resistance at each equipment.
3. Loop impedance of each circuit.
4. Earth leakage protection device test.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.13 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats
to suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for
timing and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.15 SERVICES CROSSING BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS
A. At points where services cross the building expansion joints, flexible connections,
compensators, or expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate the building movement
within the services installation.
B. Brackets and supports each side of the flexible joint shall be so arranged that the services
crossing the building expansion joint remain and correctly aligned.
3.16 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. All testing and commissioning procedures and requirements shall be coordinated with other
involved Construction Packages Contractors to achieve the proper and full functionality of
electrical systems and networks other related Construction Packages as per the design intent,
as further detailed in drawings and described in the Contract Documents.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete startup, testing, and operator
training services to demonstrate operability of all electrical equipment/systems supplied and
any Employer-furnished components and materials provided.
C. In the absence of incoming permanent power supply or any other permanent source to the
building at the time of the building electrical systems' testing and commissioning, the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing the full power required, on temporary basis,
using Contractor’s supplied and operated back-up generators, for all systems startup, testing
and commissioning activities. This shall be closely coordinated with the Engineer and
Employer during the electrical systems' testing and commissioning procedures
D. All electrical equipment including the interfaces with the building management system,
control systems, communication systems, software and all alarm circuits and operating
modes for each piece of equipment shall be tested by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer before any facility is put into operation. Tests shall be as specified herein and in

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
the Specification section applicable to and as specified for the various pieces of equipment.
The testing and commissioning is to be done in the presence of the equipment
manufacturer/supplier authorized representative. As a minimum, the startup tests shall be
sufficiently detailed and comprehensive to demonstrate and verify that the equipment has
been properly assembled, aligned, and connected and that the control and information
circuitry and any associated controllers, panels, and software systems are fully operational
and functioning as designed. Any changes, adjustments, or replacements required to make
the equipment operate as specified shall be performed as part of the Works.
E. Testing and startup procedures shall include detailed descriptions of all pre-operational
electrical, communication and software and instrumentation testing work. Each control
device, item of electrical, and instrumentation equipment, software and all control circuits
shall be considered in the testing procedures. The testing procedures shall be established /
prepared in a stepwise, logical sequence to verify that all equipment has been properly
serviced, aligned, connected, wired, calibrated, and adjusted prior to operation.
F. Any special testing equipment, loads or instrumentation required shall be provided to the
Employer at the Contractor’s cost during startup and pre-operational testing of systems and
equipment.
G. Contractor shall be responsible for the startup, adjustment, preliminary maintenance, and
checkout of all equipment and instrumentation. All systems shall be carefully checked for
conformance with the Contract Documents including Design Drawings, Specifications, and
other Contract documents, which provide performance requirements (e.g., Design Criteria
document(s) when provided by the Employer as part of the Contract Package).
H. If any equipment or system does not operate as specified in the Contract Documents, replace
or repair components until they operate properly and meet the specified performance
requirements.
I. When system startup and testing is complete, submit ("draft") test reports to the Engineer for
review and acceptance within two (2) weeks of the completion of the tests and before the
final test reports are issued (no later than one month from the final date of completion of the
tests).
J. When electronic/hardware/software or electrical equipment is found to be deficient

compared with the specified performance criteria/requirements, adjustments shall be made
by a qualified representative of the manufacturer.
K. If adjustments fail to correct the operation and performance of equipment, remove the
equipment from the Site and replace it with new equipment that meets the specified
requirements.
L. For further details regarding the testing and commissioning management requirements, refer
to Division 1 Documents.
3.17 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials
to client stores.
END OF SECTION 260500

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500 applies to work of

this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all medium voltage (22 KV) cables, terminations and
connections, complete with all accessories in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications and as required for a complete system. Cable size referenced
in this Section is metric.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of medium voltage

cables, and connections of types, sizes and ratings required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

IEC 60502 pertaining to medium cables joints and terminations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on medium voltage cables and

connectors.
B. Samples : Submit 50 cm length cable of each type and size of medium

voltage cables, Manufacturer Name, insulation class and reference No.
Should be indicated on the Submitted Sample.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Refer to list of recommended manufacturers.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Provide all of the medium cables shown on the drawings.

All cables shall comply with IEC 60502 and all conductors shall be aluminium
or copper XLPE insulated armoured and P.V.C. sheathed (18/30 K.v).
B. Conductors shall be stranded, round and compacted according to IEC 60228.
C. The insulation of each conductor shall be colour coded and shall be

maintained throughout the entire installation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. For each lot of cable supply a certificate of origin issued by the manufacturer
stating its origin, manufacturer, constitution and standards to which it
complies with. In the absence of such documents, the Engineer reserves the
right to require that tests, at the Contractor's expense, be performed by an
official laboratory on samples taken from lots of cables delivered to the Site.
E. Be responsible for any delays in the work resulting from non-compliance with
the requirements mentioned above.
F. Cable installations whether so indicated or not shall include all joints and their
accessories at terminating ends earthing and bonding etc. Carried to
completion.
G. All cables shall be delivered to site with the manufacturer's seals, labels, or
other proof of origin intact. Such labels and seals shall not be removed until
the cable is required for use, and shall be retained for inspection.
H. Unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the drawings or in the cable

schedules all cable oversheaths shall be black.
I. Cables shall be handled, terminated and installed in accordance with the

cable manufacturer's recommendations. The technical advice of the
manufacturer's recommendations. The technical advice of the
manufacturer's specialists shall be followed if any special conditions or
unusual circumstances apply.
J. Full details, with illustrations, of all cable supports and fixing devices shall be
submitted before any orders are placed or work put in hand. All cable
supports and fixing devices shall be designed to have a factor of safety of
not less than 4.
K. Wherever cables pass through floors a heavy-gravy-gauge UPVC sleeve

shall be provided, of internal diameter greater by at least 15 mm, but not
more than 25 mm, than the diameter of the cable and projecting above floor
level by at least 50 mm.
L. Where cables pass through walls and/or floors which form part of the
building's fire compartmentation, the hole(s) through which the cables pass
shall be sealed after the cables have been installed, so as to give the same
standard of fire resistance as the original wall or floor. Details of the
proposed sealing method shall be submitted prior to implementation.
2.3 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. M.V. cables shall be XLPE with armour sheath, three core, Aluminum
or copper conductors (refer to cable schedules).
2. The cables shall comply with the IEC 60228, 60230 and 60502.
B. CONSTRUCTION
1. Construction of 18/30 k.V. cables shall have three conductors of

Aluminum concentric standard wires in accordance with IEC- 60288

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
"Nominal cross-section and composition of conductors of insulated

cables".
2. Each conductor shall have an extruded screen covering of

semi-conducting compound.
3. Each conductor shall have a zone resistant layer of cross- linked

polyethylene (XLPE) extruded on the screened conductor.
4. The insulation shall be suitable for continuous conductor temperature

of 90C, maximum emergency conductor temperature 130C and
maximum short circuit conductor temperature 250C.
5. Each core (insulated conductor) shall be screened by either a semi

conducting, tape or layer of extruded semi conducting compound, but
shall be completely free stripping.
6. Each screened core shall be shielded with a layer of copper tape.
7. Each shielded core shall have an extruded sheath of thermoplast, to

prevent moisture from penetrating and provides a good corrosion
protection.
8. The three cores shall be assembled together, the interstices filled with
non-hygroscopic material so that the completed cable assembly is of
substantial circular cross-section.
9. The inner covering wrapping the three cores together shall be of

extruded corrosion resistant material. The materials used for the filler
and inner covering shall be suitable for the cable operating
temperature. The thickness of the inner covering shall be in accordance
with IEC - 60502.
10. Identification of cables shall be carried out by embossing on the outer

PVC sheath the voltage rating (class), size and number of conductors,
manufacturer's name throughout the whole length of cables.
11. Identification of phases shall be carried out by using numbered

insulated metal tapes (1, 2 & 3) throughout the whole core under the
copper shield.
2.4 CABLE TESTING
A. As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and termination

of the cables specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the
Contractor shall carry out the tests, together with such other tests and
measurements to prove compliance with this Specification and with the
requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B. An insulation resistance test, carried out with a "Megger" insulation tester or

other similar type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation resistance
between each conductor and the remaining conductors and between each
conductor and the metallic sheath (if any) and armouring.
C. The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any pressure tests
and the insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in IEC 60230.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
The contractor shall submit insulation resistance figures for medium voltage
cables.
D. A voltage test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance with the

in IEE wiring regulation 17th edition.
E. Phase-rotation and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the

cables have been correctly connected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which medium voltage, cables are to be installed.

Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of
the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cables as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of cables with other

works.
C. Pull cables simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway.
D. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must

not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave cable
grips which will not damage cables or raceway.
F. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed

structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible.
G. Complete conduit or raceway installation (joints made up tightly and the

entire run secured in place) before pulling cables.
H. Seal, between the cable and conduit with a non-hardening compound

approved for the purpose, cable entering a building from underground where
cable exits the conduit.
I. Install cable spacers as required. Provide conduit fittings for spacing of
cables at terminations.
A. Check for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with

drawings.
B. Megger conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for continuity and

insulation tests before connection to utilization devices.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Perform tests prior to connecting equipment and in presence of authorized

representatives.
D. Submit written reports of test results.
E. Prior to energization, test cables for electrical continuity.
F. Subsequent to cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct
malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 260519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low voltage (LV) feeder cables, branch circuit wiring, control and
signal cables, termination, jointing and splicing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section “Fire stopping for fire stopping materials and installation
equipment
2. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" with its related sections.
4. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" with its related
sections.
5. Division 26 Section "Under Floor Raceways for Electrical Systems" with its related
sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying capacities,

de-rating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. Manufacturer's catalogue cuts.
3. Dimensional and electrical characteristics.
4. Manufacturer's drawings showing the outline of the lugs and sleeve connectors
together with all pertinent dimensions. Any variation in these dimensions due to
manufacturing tolerances shall be indicated.
B. Samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by Engineer, other accessories.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of trays, feeder, sub-feeder cables and
branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and verify coordination
between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and bushings at
enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with
final conduit routing.
D. Certificate of Origin: For each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin issued by
manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards to which it
complies and test certificates. All test certificates shall comply with the test requirements of
the relevant standard to which the cable is manufactured.
E. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test records for cables
and accessories in accordance with the Standards.
F. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
G. Cable Jointing Qualifications: Submit details of the proposed cable jointers qualifications
prior to work commencing on site.
H. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
I. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced and certified cable splicer to install, splice
and terminate low-voltage cables.
B. Standards: Wires and cables shall comply with IEC or other equally approved standards and
shall bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they are manufactured. Wires
and cables not having this identification will be rejected.
C. Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in accordance with the
Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected conditions of installation. No
change will be accepted in specified type of insulation unless warranted by special
conditions and approved by Engineer. Check various loads and current carrying capacities
and report any discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to Engineer.
A. Deliver wires and cables properly packaged in factory packed or fabricated containers,
wound on factory reels.
B. Store wires and cables in dry areas, and protect from weather, fumes, water, debris, etc.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is
maintained.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to Project's Approved Vendors / Manufacturers List.
2.2 GENERALLY
A. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders
shall have copper conductors. Cable conductors shall be stranded for sections 4 mm2 and
above, based on IEC 60228 Class 2. Signal and control cables shall have solid conductors
unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors. Conductors
of single-core cables 25-mm2 and above shall be compacted. Multi-core cables 35-mm2 and
above shall be sectorial shape.
B. Conductor sizes shall be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with cross-
sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
C. Low voltage cables, cable terminations and building wiring insulation shall be color coded
or otherwise identified as required by the Regulations and as follows:
1. Neutral shall be blue.

2. Protective earth shall be green/yellow striped.
3. Phase colors shall be brown, black, grey or use color coding in accordance with local
regulations and standards.
D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which outer jacket is
not color-coded shall have engraved alphanumeric mark (L1, L2, L3) or color coded heat-
shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables (where required): Cables buried directly in the ground shall be armored type,
unless otherwise indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
F. Outdoor cables (where required) exposed to sunlight shall be provided with ultraviolet
resistant PVC sheath having 2.5% black carbon content.
2.3 LV WIRES AND CABLES

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Single Core PVC Insulated Non-Sheathed Cables (Building / Apartments Wires): Unless
otherwise specified, single conductor cables for wiring in conduit shall have annealed
copper conductors, compacted, generally with concentric strands and insulated with flame
retardant insulation to IEC 60332-1, moisture and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227-1 and
3, suitable for wet locations and for conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and cables
shall be 450/750 V grade.
B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have aluminum conductors, compacted,
insulated with PVC/A to IEC 60502-1, moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations
and conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler and sheathed
with flame retardant PVC/ST2. Cables shall comply with IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811the
latest edition of IET– Wiring Regulations.
C. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed, copper conductors,
compacted, insulated with PVC/A to IEC 60502-1, moisture and heat resistant, suitable for
wet locations and conductor temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler
and sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2. Armored cables shall have single layer of
galvanized steel wire armor with flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Cables shall comply
with IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.
D. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core circular stranded
aluminum conductors, compacted, insulated with moisture and heat resistant cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C.
and flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Cables shall comply with IEC 60502-1, IEC
60332-3, and IEC 60811.
E. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Multicore aluminum conductors,
compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up and bedded
with suitable non-hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation and flame retardant
PVC/ST2 over-sheathed, color black., color black. Cables shall comply with IEC 60502-1,
IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.
F. Multi-core shall be of reduced neutral where the triple harmonic content (third harmonic
current or multiples of the third harmonic) of the connected load is less than 15% of the
fundamental line current in compliance with the latest edition of BS7671 (IET – Wiring
Regulations) and IEC 61000. Otherwise, four core cables shall be used as shown on
drawings. The 3 core cables with reduced neutral shall be considered for the following
conductors sizes, in accordance with BS7671 (IET – Wiring Regulations):
1. Greater than 16 mm2 for copper,

2. Greater than 25 mm2 for aluminum
G. Where required, Multi-Core Single Shielded XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (minimum
0.6/1 kV) for Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): To have stranded copper conductors, class
2 to IEC 60228, compacted, adequately thick XLPE insulated, for conductor temperature of
90 deg. C. An overall tinned copper braided screen shall be provided to achieve transfer
impedance not exceeding 100 mOhm/m in the frequency range up to 100 MHz calculated in
accordance with IEC 61196-1 or ANSI/NEMA WC 61. Cable shall have a flame retardant
PVC/ST2 or LS0H over-sheath as shown on the drawings, LS0H over-sheath shall comply
with IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and IEC
60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas, color black. Each feeder shall be provided
with 3 nos. symmetrically arranged grounding conductors except for feeders less than 16
mm2 which shall be four core having the fourth core acting as a ground conductor. Cables
shall be used with variable frequency drive applications. Cable length shall not exceed 40 m
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
unless proper common mode, (dv/dt), or sinus filters are specified in the VFD, or as
otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Cables shall
comply with IEC 60092 or IEEE 1580, IEC 60502-1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.
H. Where required, VFD Cables Feeding Life Safety Equipment (Such as smoke /
pressurization fans … etc.): Class 2 to IEC 60228, fire resistant type to IEC 60331-21 with
LS0H over sheath to IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for halogen acid gas
content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas.
I. Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) Cables: 600/1000 V grade, copper conductor,
compacted, insulated with extruded material to IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC
60754-1 for halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of evolved gas.
Cores and cross sectional area shall be as shown on the Drawings. Phases shall be color
coded in conformity with the Standards, and overall cable sheath shall be extruded black
LS0H material. Cables shall comply with IEC 60332-3.
J. Flexible cable for connection to appliances, window fans, pendants etc. shall be 300/500 V
grade to IEC 60227-5, class 5 to IEC 60228, three or four core, with tinned finely stranded
copper wires, heat resistant with PVC/E insulation and PVC/ST10 sheath. As an alternative,
EPR insulation, twisted and sheathed with Chlorosulphonated Polyethylene (CSP)
compound and with strengthening cord may be used.
K. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR1 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type
FP 100, El Sewedy Cables - Product No. "Fire Guard 100", or approved equal): Single core
stranded plain annealed copper conductors to IEC 60228, fire resistant insulation category
CWZ to BS 6387 for sizes up to 6 mm2, PH120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 120
minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434-2 when tested in 20 mm rigid steel
conduit and Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC
60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for
flame retardant properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V,
capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature of 90 deg.
C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing on cable
sheath. Cable shall be used as branch circuits installed in exposed in steel conduits above
false ceiling or installed embedded in PVC conduits inside walls / concrete for use in central
battery system, smoke curtains, motorized smoke dampers, NOVEC control panels, and
other similar loads where shown on the drawings.
L. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FR4 on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type
FP Plus, or approved equal) : Multi core plain annealed copper conductors to IEC 60228 (in
sizes up to 4 mm2), fire resistant insulation, galvanized steel wire armored, category CWZ
to BS 6387, PH 120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 120 minutes rating when tested in
accordance with BS 8434-2 and complying with BS EN 50363, laminated aluminum screen
bonded to the sheath and LS0H composite sheath with tinned earth continuity
conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply
with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall be rated
300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor temperature
of 70 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked by embossing
on cable sheath. Cable shall be used for fire alarm, voice evacuation installations,
emergency voice communication systems, and other similar loads requiring category 2&3
circuits in accordance with BS 8519 and where shown on the drawings.
M. Fire resistant LS0H Cable 600/1000 V, (abbreviated as FR6 on the drawings, similar to
Prysmian - Type FP-600S, or approved equal): Multi core plain copper stranded circular or
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
shaped conductor (sizes up to 400 mm2) complying with IEC 60228 with fire resistant
insulation category F120 to BS 7846 and tested in accordance with BS 8491 and complying
with BS EN 50363 operating conductor temperature 90ºC, single galvanized steel tape
armour and extruded low smoke zero halogen (LS0H) over sheath wire to IEC 61034 and
IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for
flame retardant properties. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked
by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be used for feeders of the smoke and pressurizing
fans, firefighting elevators, and other firefighting and life safety loads requiring category
2&3 circuits in accordance with BS 8519 including buildings with evacuation time higher
than 30 minutes, such as high assembly and high rise buildings and where shown on the
drawings.
N. Fire resistant LS0H Cable (abbreviated as FRE on the drawings, similar to Prysmian - Type
FP 100, or approved equal): Single core stranded plain annealed copper conductors to IEC
60228, fire resistant insulation to IEC 60331 and Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H)
composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply
with IEC 60332-1 & 3 (category C) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall comply with
BS EN 50363 and rated 450/750 V for sizes up to 10 mm2 and 600/100 V for sizes greater
than 10mm2, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating conductor
temperature of 90 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB and BASEC certified, audited and marked
by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall have green/yellow striped color and shall be used
as earth conductor for fire resistant feeders.
2.4 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES
A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm2, 2.5 mm2 or
stranded 4 mm2 plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/A to IEC 60502-
1, rated for 70 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores shall be laid up together and
filled with non-hygroscopic material, and covered with copper wire or tape screen and over
sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST1, to form compact and circular cable for use in
switchgear, control gear and generally for control of power and lighting systems. Armored
cable shall have extruded PVC bedding which may be an integral part of the filling,
galvanized steel tape wire armoring, and over-sheath of flame retardant PVC/ST1 to IEC
60502-1 and IEC 60332-1, color black. Core identification shall be white printed numbers 1,
2, 3 etc. over black insulation.
B. Cables shall be certified to have passed IEC 60331 fire resistance and IEC 60332-1 flame
retardance and reduced flame propagation to category CWZ of BS 6387.
C. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, shall be generally 300 V
rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter),
twisted together into pairs. Multi-pair core assembly shall be covered with binder tape,
spirally wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and
overall PVC sheath.
D. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables, shall be
insulated for same voltage grade.
E. Multi core PVC insulated cables (300/500 V) annealed copper conductors, solid conductors,
up to 4 mm2 unless otherwise indicated, insulated with moisture and heat resistant PVC/C to
IEC 60227 and with over sheath of flame redundant PVC type ST1 to IEC 60227 and IEC
60332-1.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.5 TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS (LV POWER)
A. Connector terminations and splices shall be of class A to IEC 61238-1.
B. Connectors shall be compression, barrel crimped type.
C. Connectors for copper conductors shall be made of electrolytic copper.
D. Connectors for aluminum conductors shall be made of aluminum alloy of purity not less
than 99.5%.
E. All termination and splice connectors specified above shall be tin plated with minimum
thickness of 5 microns for copper material and 7 microns for aluminum material. Aluminum
connectors shall incorporate neutral grease to avoid aluminum oxidation
F. Termination connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of barrel made of

aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% and palm made of forged copper connected
using a friction stir welding.
G. Splice connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of two barrels, one is made
of electrolytic copper and the other is made of aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5%
connected using a friction stir welding.
H. Splice connectors shall have a central stop to divide the connector into two equal parts to
facilitate the correct cable positioning.
I. Connectors shall be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in

characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress distribution and water-tightness. Materials and
methods of jointing shall be approved before confirmation of order.
J. Connectors shall be suitable for cable size used.
K. Connector - Type A-1: Heat shrinkable or cold shrinkable for making T-taps and splices on
conductors used in external lighting fittings connections.
L. Connector - Type A-2: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making T-taps and splices on
conductors 10 mm2 and smaller. Connector shall be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to
conductor by mechanical crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic
insulating covers.
M. Connector - Type A-3: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or making T-taps and
splices on conductors 16 mm2 and larger. Connector shall be cast non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic
insulating cover.
N. Connector - Type B-1: Pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
Connector shall be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl cap and skirt.
O. All components of lugs and connectors shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s
name, die number, cable / conductor size, number of crimps and position.
P. Contractor to follow the instructions of manufacturers according to the catalogues to ensure

proper termination/connection of the aluminum cables.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
Q. Cable terminals to be covered during connection making to protect it against humidity.
R. Cable cross-section area shall be in circular shape to ensure proper use with cable lugs and
connectors according to DIN standards.
S. Aluminum cable lugs to be selected in accordance to DIN 48201, and Aluminum cable
connectors to be in accordance with DIN 46267 part II.
T. Cable lugs and connectors to be compressed using hydraulic piston according to cable size
with taking into consideration the number of compressions to be according to according to
their lengths (in accordance with instructions of manufacturers).
2.6 CABLE GLANDS
A. Cable glands shall comply with BS 6121-1, BS 6121-5 and BS EN 50262.
B. Cable glands used with unarmored cables shall be made of brass, type A2 to BS 6121-5,
with mechanical retention class B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8 to BS EN
50262 and an environmental seal to the cable outer sheath. Glands shall be deluge protected,
with IP66 degree of protection to IEC 60529.
C. Cable glands used with single steel tape armored cables shall be made of brass, type CW to
BS 6121-5, with mechanical retention class B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8
to BS EN 50262, electrical continuity via armor wire termination category B to BS EN
50262, earth tag to BS EN 50262 and an environmental seal to the cable outer sheath.
Glands shall have IP66 degree of protection to IEC 60529.
D. Cable glands used with steel tape or wire braid armor shall have similar characteristics as
specified in paragraph 2.6C except gland type which shall be CX instead of CW to BS
6121-5.
E. Cable glands used with single steel tape armored cables where sprinkler / water mist
firefighting systems are used shall be made of brass, type E1W to BS 6121-5, with
mechanical retention class B to BS EN 50262, impact resistance category 8 to BS EN
50262, electrical continuity via armor wire termination category B to BS EN 50262, earth
tag to BS EN 50262 and an environmental seal to the cable inner and outer sheaths. Glands
shall be deluge protected, with IP66 degree of protection to IEC 60529.
F. Cable glands used with steel tape or wire braid armor shall have similar characteristics as
specified in paragraph 2.6E except gland type which shall be E1X instead of E1W to BS
6121-5.
G. Cable glands for use in explosive hazardous areas shall be flame proof with protection Ex d
to IEC 60079-1 and have same applicable characteristics according to cable type as above.
H. Stainless steel grade 316 cable glands shall be used in installations in chemical and
extremely corrosive areas and where stainless steel enclosures are used. Glands shall have
same applicable characteristics according to cable type as above.
I. Aluminum cable glands shall be used for cables with aluminum wire armor. Glands shall
have same applicable characteristics according to cable type as above.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
J. Cable glands used with LS0H or fire resistant cables shall be of the applicable type as stated
above and provided with low smoke fume shroud.
K. Cable glands shall be suitable for cable size used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes receiving wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires
and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Before pulling wires in conduit check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general) is free
of burrs and is dry and clean.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Building wires and cables shall be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors
and in conduit outdoors, unless otherwise shown the Drawings.
B. Circuits: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, final branch circuit wiring shall be run
inside trunking or conduits, D.C. wiring shall be run in separate conduits from A.C. wiring,
and emergency lighting and power circuits shall be run in separate conduits from normal
circuits.
C. Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards shall be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards shall be balanced. Ensure
that the lighting load and other loads are balanced with a difference of not more than 10%
between the phases.
D. Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in conduit
and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
E. Bunching of wires in raceways shall be in accordance with raceway filling factors permitted
by the Regulations.
F. Lubricants shall be used for pulling wire or cable if character of pull would otherwise
damage conductors, insulation or jacket. Lubricants shall be approved by the Engineer.
G. Pull conductors into raceways simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the
same raceway.
H. Support: Cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers shall be supported at upper
end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve any stresses on
conductors, where required.
I. Wiring at Outlets: Leave a slack of at least 200mm at each outlet.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
J. Extra Length: At every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through shall
be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables terminating in outlet
boxes shall be left with at least 250-mm extra length for terminations.
K. Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, shall be permanently accessible or made only
in boxes or cabinet gutters.
L. Insulating covers shall be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
M. Switch legs for local wall switches shall have distinctive color, selected as complementary
to cable color coding used in the project.
N. Terminations: Conductors of wires and cables up to 6 mm2 for copper conductors and up to
10 mm2 for aluminum conductors shall be tightly twisted and where possible doubled back
before being clamped with set screws. Where two or more wires are looped into same
terminal these conductors shall be tightly twisted together before inserting into terminals. As
an alternative, fork / ring, compression / twisting type connectors may be used for cable
termination. In no case bare conductor shall be allowed to project beyond any insulated
shrouding or mounting of a line terminal. Cables sizes 10 mm2 and larger for copper
conductors and 16 mm2 and larger for aluminum conductors shall terminate in compression
lug connectors.
O. Tagging: Tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. Tags shall identify cable or circuit number and
conductor size in accordance with the Schedules.
P. Tagging: Where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device, outlet box or
ceiling junction box, each circuit shall be tagged as a guide in making connections.
3.3 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER INSTALLATION (0.6/1 KV)
A. Cables generally shall be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses, clamped to steel
racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts shall be LS0H type or installed in
steel conduits.
B. Fixing: Single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces shall be fixed directly
to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables are run in parallel,
they shall be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved special cable
supporting and protecting arrangement.
C. Clamps: Where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved galvanized
cast steel clamps (or nonmagnetic clamps for single core cables) shall be used at distances
not exceeding 20 diameters.
D. Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub-feeders. Cables shall be supplied in
lengths sufficient for straight-through un-jointed termination to termination pull.
E. Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, shall be laid in
heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in concrete, in
masonry or in floor finishing.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Buried cables liable to mechanical damage shall be drawn through PVC conduit or asbestos
cement pipe. If steel conduit is used, all three-phase conductors, neutral and protective earth
circuits shall be in the same conduit.
G. Exposure to Heat: Route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or to
corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables shall be type designed for
particular condition.
H. Insulating covers shall be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections. Insulating
cover shall be purpose made and shall provide minimum insulation level equal to that of
conductor insulation.
I. Glands for various single-core and multi-core cables shall be purpose made and suitable for
rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
J. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements using approved fire-stopping material
according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".
K. Identify wires and cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
3.4 CABLE CONNECTIONS, JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturer's lengths
are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes, handholes or
manholes.
B. Recommendation: Through joints and terminations shall be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and made with correct specified
materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and bonds as
applicable.
C. Jointing: Joints shall be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless contrary to cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-
joints shall be submitted prior to commencing work on site. Samples shall be constructed in
the presence of the Engineer and shall be available for test and inspection in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables shall be purpose made, to prevent damage
to insulation in general.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors shall be by use of 'Scotch Brite' sponge and white spirit
or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts, in accordance with
manufacturers published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
international standards.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. For general requirements regarding field quality control procedures, refer to Specification
Section 260500, Clause 3.12.
B. Cable tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.
C. Advise Employer and Engineer in advance of dates and times tests shall be performed on
cables.
D. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards.
E. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives
stipulated in Specification Section 260500, Clause 3.12, and it is not allowed to operate any
equipment without approval and attendance of the Engineer/Employer.
F. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.
G. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable. Use 500 V megger
on installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V.
H. Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest edition of BS 7671 (“ wiring Regulations”).
I. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables shall be minimum 10000 Megohm-km for
PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core
and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
J. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
K. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.
L. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance.
M. Correct malfunctioning cables and accessories at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
N. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. The following Sections contain special requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for
ground earth pits.
2. Division 26 Section "Lightning Protection" for additional grounding and bonding

materials.
4. Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables".
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes complete installations to earth every source of energy and to the
building (Not in the Package's Contract), while the downstream part within the building
limit of work shall be based on TN-S system, including:
1. Foundation earthing electrodes.

2. Main Earthing terminals or bars.
3. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment.
4. Extraneous conductive parts.
5. Bonding to structural reinforcement bars
6. Down conductors.
7. Earthing conductors.
8. Earth points.
9. Protective earthing and bonding conductors.
B. Earthing requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special

requirements of systems described in other Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are equivalent and may
be used interchangeably: "earth" and "ground"; "earthing" and "grounding".
B. Earth: Conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
C. Earth Electrode: Conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Foundation earth electrodes: Earth electrodes buried in the blinding concrete layer
underneath the water proof membrane of the foundations.
E. Exposed Conductive Part: Any part which can be readily touched and which is not a live
part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
F. Extraneous Conductive Part: Any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators,
cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non-insulating floors and walls.
G. Protective Conductor: Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock
and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
1. Exposed conductive parts.

2. Extraneous conductive parts.
3. Earth electrode(s).
4. Main earthing terminal or bar(s).
5. Earthed point of the source(s).
6. Samples of conductors connectors, or any other accessories as requested by the
engineers.
H. Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: Earth electrodes located at such distance from
one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly
affect the potential of the other(s).
I. Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: The terminal or bar provided for the connection of
protective conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if
any to the means of earthing.
J. Earth Point: The connector or terminal provided for the termination of protective
conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the
means of earthing. Used as provisions for future installation of main earthing terminals or
bars.
K. Equipotential Bonding: Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive

parts at a substantially equal potential.
L. Earthing Conductor: Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an

installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not
limited to, manufacturer’s catalogues for each type of product indicated including the
following:
1. Ground rods (if required).

2. Connecting clamps.
3. Earthing conductors, protective conductors, and bonding conductors.
4. Connectors and other accessories.
5. Exothermic welding kits and tools.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6. Earth points.
7. Pressure waterproofing bushing.
8. Test links.
9. Ground rods
10. Connecting clamps.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:
1. Test procedures used and test conditions.

with requirements.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of

laying and covering.
2. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.
3. Layout and details of earthing provisions at electrical and telecom rooms, distribution
panelboards, etc., within the Package scope , indicating fittings used, insulation,
plates and marking, passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves,
grooves, niches etc., giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
4. Layout and details for bonding and earthing locations and provisions. Include
indications for use of raceway and sleeves, and data on how concealment
requirements will be met
5. Exact location of earth rods (if required) and details of installation and connections.
E. Records: Submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all

components of earthing system.
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used.
4. Test conditions and results.
F. Samples: Submit samples of conductors, as requested by Engineer.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing

earthing systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Standards: Carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC 60364-1, IEC 60364-51, IEC 60364-5-55 and IEC 60364-4-41: Electrical
Installations in Buildings.
2. Latest edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations, BS 7671.
3. BS 7430: Code of Practice for Earthing.
4. TIA J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of earthing termination network with installation of other packages

systems and components, including excavations, foundations, waterproofing, supporting
structures and building materials, requiring bonding to earthing system components.
B. Coordinate the provisions for connection other adjacent packages earthing termination
networks to ensure the complete earthing network functionality. Contractor shall thus
coordinate with the involved Contractors of the other construction phases / packages for all
required interconnected earthing networks tie-in points to achieve the complete earthing
networks/ systems integrity, compatibility & functionality as per the design intent.
C. Comply with IEC 62305 for interconnection with lightning protection system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
2.2 SOIL SURVEY AND CALCULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall carry out an earth resistivity surveys on each site and report in writing
to the Engineer in accordance with the approved program. The report shall detail the
methods and instruments used and the results of the surveys.
B. The surveys shall show the variation of resistivity across the site and with the depth below
the site. The Contractor shall consider if there is a need to model the resistivity in two
layers and if there is any advantage in the use of additional ground rods. The surveys shall
also determine the depth and nature of any underlying rock, which may limit the depth for
driving earth rods (if required) or if boring will be necessary for installing earth rods.
C. The weather conditions prior to and at the time of the surveys shall be recorded in the report
and an assessment made of the seasonal variations in resistivity based on meteorological
data for the area. The program for the project should, as far as possible, time the resistivity
surveys to take place during a dry season.
D. The report should also state if there are any indications that the ground is corrosive to
copper or if there is any risk of galvanic corrosion on other metal structures in the
neighborhood.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E. Earth Electrode Calculations:
1. The final earth electrode system shall be based on the approved earth resistivity data
and the systems fault currents and their duration.
2. The calculations shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval and shall be based on the
methods given in the standards listed. The calculations shall include the following
parameters:
a. Earth resistance of the whole system and of its components.

b. Earth potential rise.
c. Step, touch and mesh potentials inside and outside the perimeter fence (where
applicable).
d. Requirements for a high resistance surface layer.
e. Conductor ratings.
3. The earth potential rises shall not exceed the ITU limits appropriate to the
classification of the system unless special precautions are taken to cater for
transferred potentials.
4. Step, touch and mesh potentials shall be within the limits calculated in accordance
with the standards given in BS 7430 for the proposed surface layer. The formula for
allowable body current shall be used for 50 Kg body weight.
5. The Contractor shall show in the calculations that the fault currents and d.c. stray
currents will not damage the structure.
F. The report shall be approved by the Engineer before material ordering and implementation
of the earthing system.
G. The calculations shall be submitted for approval prior to commencing the installation of the
earthing systems.
2.3 FAULT CURRENT AND DURATION
A. The earthing system design calculation by the Contractor shall be based on earth fault
withstand current as shown on Drawings.
B. The estimated maximum duration of the fault current considered in the design shall not be
less than 1 second.
2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:
1. Earth electrode (conductors, rods “if required”, tapes, etc.)

2. Earthing terminals or bars.
3. Earthing conductors.
4. Protective conductors.
5. Equipotential bonding conductors.
6. Electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems.
7. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Provide a common earth termination network for all services, consisting of bonding earthing
networks of all individual services. The resistance to earth should, in this case be the lowest
value needed for any of the individual services. Combined resistance to ground of the whole
network is not to exceed 1 Ohm.
C. Foundation Earth Electrode: Ring type earth electrode consisting of earthing conductors, in
closed loops, buried in the blinding concrete layer underneath the water-proofing membrane
of foundations, as shown on the Drawings. Connect all earthing and down conductors to
this ring. . Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring are to be provided, as
necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to the specified value.
D. Alternative Earth Electrode: other types of earth electrode may be used, after approval,
including:
1. Cast iron pipes with special surround material

2. Copper plate(s)
3. Tape mats (strips).
E. Lightweight Inspection Pits are to be provided for connection to other adjacent package
earthing termination networks to ensure the complete earthing network functionality, test
joint to be installed inside light weight inspection pit for the connection providing extra
length of 5 meters to the earthing network conductors to enable connection to the nearby
earthing termination network, as shown on the drawings.
F. Electrical earth bars are to be provided at UPS / CBS room and electrical rooms; as shown
on the drawings.
G. Main Telecommunication Grounding Bar (MTGB) is to be provided at main telecom room,

while Telecommunication Grounding Bars (TGB) are to be provided at telecom closets; as
shown on the drawings, in accordance with the requirements of TIA J-STD-607-A.
H. For earth bars located at UPS / CBS room, main telecom room and equipotential earth bar at
electrical room (basement 3): Provide one insulated main earthing conductor connecting
these earth bars to the earthing termination network via testing joints as shown on drawings.
Conductor is to be sized to carry maximum earth fault current of system at point of
application with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C for at 0.4 seconds for
low voltage systems.
I. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
J. The equipotential earth bar at the electrical room at basement 3 is to be connected to a

vertical copper tape via a joint clamp; as shown on the drawings. Vertical copper tape / strip
are to be installed exposed on electrical room's walls (from basement 3 to floor 20th) for
equipotential bonding.
K. Electrical rooms' earth bars are to be connected to the vertical copper tape via joint clamp &
bonding insulated copper conductor 50mm2 cross-section.
L. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor is
common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be the largest
of the conductor sizes.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with Table 54.7 of IEE Wiring Regulations

(BS 7671).
M. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like. Where
armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective conductor, if
approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
N. Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one

piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive parts of
equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by bolted
clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors which are to be
insulated by molded materials.
O. Ensure by calculation that Earth Fault Loop Impedance values for final circuits are to satisfy
the requirements of BS 7671 regulations.
P. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the

building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing terminals by
equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not
be less than half of the protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a
minimum of 4-mm2.
Q. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main
earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point
of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be
made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than
half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
R. Identification: Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every

bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with the
Regulations, as follows:
1. SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.
S. Identification: Protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of

green-and-yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as
approved.
2.5 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Buried Earth Conductors: High conductivity, annealed stranded copper conductors 120 mm2
cross-section, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. Earthing Conductors: Insulated or bare copper conductor as described in 2.4 (F).
C. Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, bare annealed stranded copper conductor 50 mm2
cross-section, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
D. Bare earthing conductors: Shall be annealed, stranded, compacted, copper conductors to IEC
60228 Class 2.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E. Insulated earthing cables: Shall have annealed copper conductors, compacted, generally
with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant insulation to IEC 60332-1,
moisture and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227-1 and 3, suitable for wet locations and for
conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Cables shall be 450/750 V grade.
F. Protective Conductors: Single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables, having
rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor forming part of
a multi-core cable, color coded.
G. Protective Bonding Conductors: Bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded copper
cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in Article
"General Requirements" hereof.
H. Equipotential Vertical Copper Tape / Stripe: High conductivity, annealed stranded copper
tape of 25 x 6mm cross section.
I. Electrical Earthing Bar: Consisting of hard drawn copper bar, 50 x 6 mm, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings. Earth bar is to be labeled 'Electrical Earth Bar' and is to be drilled,
for connection of conductors, at a spacing not less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with
copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall mounting insulators.
J. Telecommunication Systems Main Grounding Bar (TMGB): similar to above but with
minimum dimensions 100 x 6 mm for the main grounding busbar of the main
telecommunication room, and 50 x6 mm for equipment rooms grounding busbars (TGB).
K. Insulated earthing cables: Shall have annealed copper conductors, compacted, generally
with concentric strands and insulated with flame retardant insulation to IEC 60332-1,
moisture and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227-1 and 3, suitable for wet locations and for
conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Cables shall be 450/750 V grade.
2.6 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS AND EARTHING ACCESSORIES
A. Copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design, compatible with points of
connection, and of adequate cross-section and current carrying capacity.
B. Bolted Connectors and Clamps: Bolted-pressure-type connectors and clamps, or

compression type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or copper
silicon alloys.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Pressure waterproofing bushing: Used for water pressure-tight ducting of the earthing
conductors and equipotential bonding conductors through waterproofing membranes of the
foundations and to be provided with clamps for connection to 150mm2 bare stranded copper
conductor. Comply with IEC 62561 and manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 20 x 3 mm, suitable for bonding
flat surfaces, cut to length required and with drilled flat terminals for bolted connections.
Provide special bimetallic alloy terminals for joining to aluminum conductive parts

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
F. Waterproof bushing: waterproof bushing shall be used for earthing conductors penetrating
waterproof membranes, made from stainless steel, Adjustable according to wall thickness.
G. Test links: used to offer a temporary break in the connection between earthing system
components for testing purpose, made of high conductivity copper with galvanized steel
base.
2.7 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. In case earth resistance shall be achieved via adding to Ground Rods to the Earthing
Termination Network shown on Drawings, ground rods shall be provided to obtain the
required earth resistance.
B. Ground Rod: 16-mm diameter with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper molecularly bonded
into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum thickness or stainless steel, Grade 316. Driving head is
to be high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length silicon bronze, internally threaded.
Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of copper and strength. Earth rod
is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted connector of sufficient size, and number
of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.
1. Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m, extendible as necessary to obtain required earth

resistance.
2.8 INSPECTION PITS
A. Lightweight Inspection Pit: heavy duty inspection pit made of polymer square or circular
section handhole (minimum 200 mm internal diameter), with cover. Cover is to have inset
brass plate with inscription ' Inspection Pit - Do Not Remove'.
B. Inspection Pits shall include floor test joints as interface between the building Earthing
Termination Network and other Construction Packages' earthing termination network, as
shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHING OF DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, ATS, PANELBOARDS, LIGHTING

INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective conductors

run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in panelboards with
respective main distribution board earthing bar.
B. ATS: Earthing terminals or bars of ATS are to be connected by separate protective

conductors to respective normal and emergency main distribution board earth bars.
C. Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet
terminal is to be connected.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Final Ring Sub-Circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit is to be in the
form of a ring having both ends connected to earth terminal at origin of circuit in
panelboard.
E. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as
switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective earth
conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
3.2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND FIXED MACHINERY
A. Motor and other mechanical equipment earth terminals are to be connected by protective
earth conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel
or distribution unit.
3.3 SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. Signal and communication systems room is to have separate earthing bar conveniently
located, and connected by two insulated earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar,
through testing joints to the earth electrode and to earthing bar at UPS/CBS room. Earthing
conductors are to be minimum 70 mm2 or as shown on drawings.
B. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide 16mm2
minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to
each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location, unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or recommended by system provider.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Continuity:
1. Ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and mechanically

secure.
2. Ensure electrical continuity of the steel reinforcing bars throughout the structure.
B. Earth Rods: While siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with individual
rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 1 m horizontally
from foundations of buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be
drilled before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal
filler that will not corrode, is to be provided around the rod.
C. Buried earthing conductors are to be laid in the blinding concrete layer under the
waterproofing membrane.
D. Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth electrodes and earth points
/earthing terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) concealed inside building
structure by approved supports, and are to be protected against mechanical damage and
corrosion.
E. Protective Conductors: Separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable, are to
be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
F. Protective Bonding: Remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at threads,
contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to make
secure bonds.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Protection against Corrosion: Protect bolted connections against corrosion either by filling
with Vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
B. Connections: Earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth

connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
C. Connections: Where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds

that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable.
E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
B. Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.
cables.
F. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests
G. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked
against specified resistance.
H. Tests on the grounding system shall be made after complete installation and interconnection
of the ground system elements including ground grid cables, connections to structural steel,
reinforcing bars, incoming water piping, ground busses on walls and within equipment, etc.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
J. Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors as well as of the steel reinforcement bars
throughout the structure are to be checked.
K. Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against calculated
impedance figures.
L. Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
M. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments
3.7 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it
as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include
application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division 2
Section "Landscaping." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

servicing, and maintaining earthing system components.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with the Employer, through the Engineer, with at least 7 days'
advance notice.
. END OF SECTION 260526

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes boxes and raceways including conduits, wireways, and related
installations and accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders,
branch circuit wiring and wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"

2. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceways and box
supports.
3. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-
box service fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, manufacturers'
catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking, boxes, etc. and
related accessories
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

manufacture’s authorized representative and the contractor.
C. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. with indication of boxes, accessories and
expansion joints, size and type of conduits and boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, pull boxes, etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure,
connection of flexible conduits, vapour-tight installations in cold rooms,
weatherproof installations outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
5. For prewired installations, submit drawings for approval showing the complete
layout of all products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to the
installation of raceway lengths, device type (power and data), locations and circuits
identified.
D. Samples of each type of raceway, box, and accessory.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
E. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

electrical raceways and boxes, in accordance with requirements of the Specification,
Division 01.
F. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
A. Regulations and Standards: Conduits, wireways, cable trunking and fittings shall be
designed, constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical
protection for wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products
shall be as specified.
B. All products shall carry permanent marking by manufacturer.
C. All materials shall be stored in covered areas and protected from dust and dampness.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements
to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 RIGID HEAVY GAUGE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Heavy gauge drawn and welded steel, threaded at both ends, to BS 4568-1, with
class 4 protection to BS 4568-1, zinc coated inside and outside by hot-dip process or
sherardizing, or rigid metal / intermediate metal conduit to US Federal Specification, UL 6
and ANSI C80.1 or UL 1242 and ANSI C80.6 respectively.
B. Fittings Generally: Threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable cast iron for
conduits to BS standards and galvanized steel or die cast for conduits to UL 514B. Fittings
used in corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated.
C. Locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure shall be heavy hexagonal or castellated
pattern, for fastening.
D. Bushings for terminating conduits shall be smooth rounded brass rings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
E. Miscellaneous fittings including reducers, chase nipples, three piece unions, split couplings
and plugs shall be standard fittings designed and manufactured for the particular application.
2.3 RIGID INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): rigid high grade mild strip welded steel, hot dip
galvanized over the entire length including factory made treads after cutting with organic
corrosion resistant polymer inside coating and to US Federal Specification, UL 1242 and
ANSI C80.6.
B. IMC Fittings Generally: threaded fittings and connectors and terminations with rigid
coupling, concrete tight where required, and with red lead coated threads where site cut.
Factory made bands shall be provided where site bending is not possible.
C. Corrosion Resistance: conduits used in corrosive atmospheres shall be copper silicon alloy
or PVC coated IMC conduits and highly resistant to corrosion.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METAL TUBING
A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): welded steel, non-threaded type, galvanized externally
and protected internally with corrosion resistant enamel, and to U.S. Federal Specifications,
UL 797 and ANSI C80.3.
B. EMT Fittings Generally: thread-less pressure type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated. Factory made
bends shall be provided where site bending is not possible.
C. Corrosion Resistance: conduits used in corrosive atmospheres shall be made of aluminum or

PVC coated EMT conduits and highly resistant to corrosion.
2.5 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
A. Material: Steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type, formed from continuous length
of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with fused zinc coating on inside and outside,
and to IEC 61386 or UL 1.
B. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in indoor wet areas and shall have PVC jacket
extruded over core.
C. Flexible steel conduits used outdoors shall be liquid tight, stainless steel grade 316, to
UL360.
D. Fittings Generally: Threadless, hinged clamp type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres shall be specially treated.
E. Straight Connectors: One piece body, female end, having hinged clamp and deep slotted
machine screws for securing to conduit, male end having thread and locknut.
F. Angle connectors of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors shall be as specified for

straight connectors, except that body shall be two-piece with removable upper section.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
2.6 RIGID PVC-U CONDUIT
A. Material: Rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) with high temperature resistance,
flame retardant, non-hygroscopic and non-porous, to BS 4607, IEC 61386-1 and IEC
61386-21 or DIN 49016, heavy grade, classification code 4421, compression force 1250 N,
IEC 61386-21, DIN 49016-1 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC
60423.
B. Fittings Generally: Unbreakable, non-inflammable, self-extinguishing, heavy moulded

plastic. Expansion couplings shall be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner
water-tight neoprene rings.
C. Assembly: Conduits, boxes and accessories shall be assembled by cementing, using

manufacturer's recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts. Where no
spouts are available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
2.7 FLEXIBLE PVC-U CONDUIT
A. Material: flexible unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U), flame retardant, heat resistant,
non-hygroscopic, high resistance to impact, ribbed on circumference for flexibility to IEC
61386-1, classification code 4421, compression force 1250 N or other equal and approved
standards.
B. Fittings Generally: unbreakable, non-inflammable, self extinguishing, heavy moulded

plastic. Expansion couplings shall be telescoping double tube type, with at least two inner
water-tight neoprene rings.
2.8 STEEL CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
A. Sleeves Through Outside Walls / Water Tanks: Cast iron, with end and intermediate integral
flanges, and internal diameter larger than diameter of through-conduit. Length shall
correspond to wall thickness. Space between sleeve and conduit shall be packed with
backer rod/oakum to within 50 mm of both faces of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with
plastic compound or lead, held in place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to
flanged ends of sleeve. Alternatively, sleeves shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type WSK or other
equal and approved, with cable or conduit bolted pressure sealing components.
B. Sleeves Through Indoor Walls / Slabs: Similar to above but with cast iron or rigid heavy
gauge galvanized steel and plain ends.
C. Supports and Hangers: Galvanized malleable cast iron straps or structural steel sections with
hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
D. Expansion Joint for Embedded Steel Conduits - Type A: Watertight, flexible conduit with
end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length shall allow movement within range of joint
and shall not be less than 20 times diameter of conduit. Conduit shall be covered with thick
rubber tubing with 5 mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumper with earth clamp
shall electrically connect both sides of joint. Fitting shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type DX or other
equal and approved.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
E. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type B: Sleeve with fittings to permit
telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable conduit shall be fitted with watertight
bushing. Joint shall be weatherproof, of galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding
jumper with earth clamp shall electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting
shall be O.Z/Gedney, Type DXX or other equal and approved.
F. Expansion Joint for Exposed Steel Conduits - Type C: PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit
terminating in pull boxes and securely fixed on each side of structural expansion joint.
Bonding jumper shall electrically connect both sides of joint.
G. Tags: 50 mm diameter steel with indented lettering, rust inhibiting treatment and baked
enamel finish.
2.9 WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Components shall include wire way base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges,
panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers,
supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS EN 50085-1 and BS EN 50085-2-1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum

1.5 mm thick, protected internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc
or cadmium with top coat of enamel. Return edge shall be provided for body. Cover fixing
with simple arrangement. Stamped marking on lid and body by manufacturer. The
galvanized sheet steel shall comply with BS EN 10143.
C. PVC Trunking: to BS 4678-part 4 high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC
with grooved double locking action of the clip-on cover. Design shall be approved by
Engineer before ordering materials. Trunking shall be capable of receiving functional slot-in
hangers and demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations

and/or as shown on the Drawings. Sizing shall ensure 25 percent spare capacity.
2.10 WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Type: hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking of 1.5 mm thickness (minimum) with 1 mm
thick cover to BS EN 50085-1 and BS EN 50085-2 for trunking and ISO 1461 for
galvanizing and rated IP 54 to IEC 60529.
B. Construction: Trunking shall have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets shall be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers shall be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.
2.11 OUTLET BOXES, GENERAL

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
A. Wiring devices back boxes and conduits pull boxes shall comply with BS 4662 / IEC 60670.
Conduit circular pull boxes shall comply with BS 4607 / IEC 61386. Conduit junction boxes
shall comply with IEC 60670-22. Floor boxes shall comply with IEC 60670-23.
B. Surface or recessed boxes shall be suitable for type of related conduit or cable system.
Shapes and sizes of boxes shall be of compatible standards as switches and socket outlets
specified under Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices", and lighting fixtures selected and of
various types and mounting methods required.
C. Unused openings in outlet boxes shall be closed with molded caps or knock-out closers
manufactured for the purpose.
D. Floor outlets and plates shall be water-tight and impact resistant.
E. Floor boxes where in apartments shall be of pop-up type.
2.12 METALIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: Galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy field
installation. Special boxes shall be punched as required on Site.
B. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs. As an
alternative, UL listed boxes may be provided.
C. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: Galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and PVC
gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-ferrous, corrosion resistant
screws. As an alternative, UL listed boxes may be provided. Outdoor pull boxes installed
flushed in the building façade as provisional for landscape lighting wiring shall have
finishes / colors matching the building façade, subject to the approval of the Architectural
and ID Engineers. These outdoor pull boxes shall be accessible to enable Landscape
Contractor's works pertaining to pulling landscape lighting wiring.
D. Allow enough space for floor boxes lids to allow for the required finishing similar to the
adjacent areas and in coordination with the ID/Engineer and Drawings.
2.13 MOLDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES
A. Type: Boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems shall be heavy gauge pressure
molded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self-extinguishing, with softening point not less than
85 deg. C. Boxes shall have provision for securely terminating conduits and shall be
manufacturer's standard for required application.
B. Fittings: Boxes shall have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting
devices or accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide
additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets shall be provided
for weatherproof installations.
C. Molded plastic outlet boxes shall not be used outdoors.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
2.14 FLUSH OUTLET BOXES
A. Factory designed, with accessories necessary to accommodate specific outlets shown on the
Drawings or cable outlets as required for signal or control services, with cord-grip nipples.
Finishes shall follow the corresponding application area.
2.15 TERMINAL COLORING AND LABELING
A. Phase identification shall be marked in an approved manner on cable boxes, tail ends and
single core cables and at all connecting points. Cable boxes shall be marked with stamped
brass labels indicating the purpose of the supply where such supply is not obvious.
2.14 TERMINAL BOXES
A. The outer case of terminal boxes shall be constructed of steel sheet or weather resistant
reinforced plastic subject to Engineer’s approval and fitted with one or more hinged covers
provided with fasteners and padlocking facilities. The boxes shall be of IP56 for outdoor
installations and IP51 for indoor installations.
B. The case shall be adequately ventilated also dust and vermin proof. Removable gland plates
shall be provided at the top and bottom. They shall be supplied complete with suitable
insulating material capable of withstanding the climatic conditions and test voltages
specified herein where the glands are required to be insulated from the terminal boxes. If the
width of the box necessitates the provision of 2 hinged front covers they shall close on to a
center post which shall be removable to facilitate cable termination. The depth of the outer
case shall be not less than 200 mm unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
C. The outer cases shall be treated before painting to prevent corrosion and shall be finished in
glossy enamel to an approved color externally and white internally. Where terminal boxes
are required for installation outdoors or in damp situations, they shall be of water tight
construction and galvanized.
D. Terminal boards shall comprise banks of rail mounted, screw clamp, spring loaded insertion,
solder lug or stud type terminals as required to suit the design and duty of the cables to be
terminated, arranged in pairs horizontally and grouped in vertical formation to provide a
rigid assembly. Each pair of terminals shall be connected together at the base with a fixed or
plug type link as specified. Insulating high temperature material of self-extinguishing or
resistant to flame propagation and substantially non-hygroscopic type shall be molded
around the base of the screws or studs, links connecting pairs of screws or studs or plug
sockets to prevent exposure of live metal at the back of the terminal boards and to secure the
terminals against rotation and displacement.
E. Stud type terminal boards shall have screws or studs of 5 mm dia. for phosphor bronze or
stainless steel, and 6 mm dia. for high tensile brass, unless otherwise approved. They shall
be complete with the appropriate clamps, springs, nuts, locknuts and washers.
F. Terminal boards shall be complete with approved means for securing the wires,
identification ferrules, insulating barriers between pairs of terminals and removable
transparent non-inflammable terminal covers fitted with marker strips for identifying the
terminals. All nuts, washers, links and other components provided for securing the wires
shall be electro-tinned. Springs shall be aged and shall withstand corrosion.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
G. The clearance between adjacent terminal boards and from the sides of the case shall not be
less than 100 mm. The minimum clearance between terminal boards and the top and bottom
of the case shall be 150 mm.
H. All terminal boxes and boards shall meet the associated cable site tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONDUIT, WIREWAYS, AND BOXES, GENERAL
A. Use: Unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring shall be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to the
various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings.
B. Separate conduits and wireway installations shall be used for low voltage feeders and sub-
feeders, normal light and power circuits, emergency light and power circuits and
communication, signal and other low current systems wiring. Cables of different voltages
shall not be mixed within the same conduit or wireway as per the regulations.
C. Boxes: Pull, and splice boxes of ample capacity shall be provided as indicated or required.
Boxes shall remain permanently accessible.
D. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
E. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishings, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishings to
original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
F. Boxes Mounting Heights and Location: As specified under Division 26 Section "Wiring
Devices", and as shown on drawings.
G. Boxes: Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in
the same vertical channel.
H. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes
by conduits.
I. Tools and accessories for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems shall be
purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions.
J. Fixing: Conduits and wireway installations shall be concealed as much as possible.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
K. Sizes of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, shall be selected in accordance
with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of conductors and the space
factor as recommended by the regulations. Minimum outer diameter of conduit for all
applications shall be 25 mm, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
L. Spare capacity shall not be less than 25 percent for all raceways.
M. Mechanical Continuity: Conduits and wireways shall be effectively joined together and
connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm mechanical assembly.
Earthing jumpers shall be installed on steel conduits where required to ensure effective
electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate protective earth conductor is required
or not.
N. Metal conduits and enclosures shall be mechanically fastened, and to be connected to

electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to form low electrical resistance continuity and firm
mechanical assembly.
O. Dissimilar Metals: Use of dissimilar metals shall be avoided throughout the system to
eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, treat surfaces
with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
P. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 – piece unions, split couplings and
plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application
shall be installed as necessary.
Q. Conduits shall be tested with a mandrel. Conduits that reject a mandrel shall be replaced.
Restore conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.
R. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove

coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous
ground path.
S. No more than one wire is permitted to be terminated at one terminal.
T. Labeling of raceways and boxes; size of letters and color of labels, marking and references
shall be as per the relevant standard regulations. Expansion coupling and fittings are to be
installed near expansion joints.
3.3 CONDUITS AND WIREWAYS APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION,

GENERAL
A. Conduits and wireways installations shall be as described below, unless otherwise shown on
the drawings or described in the particular section of the Specification.
B. Rigid heavy gauge steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be used for
outdoor installations.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed installations over false ceilings
when the false ceiling is used as a return plenum.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed and above false ceiling wiring
installations used in conjunction with exit and escape route lighting/central battery circuits,
fire alarm & security installations.
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for all exposed installations in elevator
shafts, electrical equipment rooms, mechanical rooms, parking floors, kitchen, laundry and
solid waste rooms.
F. Galvanized Steel Trunking shall be used for all exposed installations in electrical equipment
rooms, mechanical rooms, parking floors.
G. PVC Trunking shall be used above false ceilings for telecommunication cables, when the
false ceiling is not used as return plenum.
H. ElectricalPlenum. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for concealed

installations in dry / gypsum board walls.
I. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be used for exposed installations in car park areas.
J. Conduit termination in sheet metal enclosures shall be fastened by lockouts, and terminate
with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.
K. Rigid PVC-U conduit shall be used for lighting and power circuits, low current,
communication and signal system wiring, where embedded in concrete, masonry,
underfloor, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings or described in the particular
section of the specification.
L. Rigid PVC-U conduit shall be used above false ceilings for lighting and power circuits, low
current, communication and signal system wiring, when the false ceiling is not used as
return plenum – and in furred walls. Use flexible PVC-U conduits from outlet boxes to
fixtures in conjunction with the use of PVC-U conduits.
M. Flexible conduit of same material as corresponding conduit system shall be used for
connection to motors, vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment and to fixtures installed in
false ceilings.
N. Equipment requiring fixed connection or heavy electric power shall be supplied by means of
flexible cord housed in metallic conduit from suitable disconnect switch, mounted adjacent
to the equipment on the wall.
O. Flexible steel conduit shall be used in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to fixture
over false ceilings when used as a return plenum. Conduits shall be liquid tight in damp
areas.
P. Liquid-tight flexible steel galvanized conduit shall be used in one or more of the following
conditions:
1. Exterior location.
2. Moist or humid atmospheres where condensate can be expected to accumulate.
3. Corrosive atmosphere.
4. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
Q. Exposure to Damage: Conduit considered to be subject to undue risk of damage by shock or

corrosion shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Copper silicone alloy tubes may
be used in corrosive atmospheres.
R. Crossing: Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.
S. Clearances: Install conduits at least, 150 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other
non- electrical services. (Hot water pipes, etc.). Wherever possible, install horizontal
conduit and wireways runs above water and steam piping.
T. Sleeves: Obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforced
concrete. Additional opening may be allowed in finished slabs, but shall be drilled. Fix
sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.
U. Waterproof Construction: Conduits shall not cross waterproof construction unless permitted
by Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings shall be used.
V. Expansion Fittings: Provide in each conduit and wireways run every 30 meters, or wherever
structural expansion joints are crossed.
W. Make good all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or
similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
X. Bends: Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting shall
not contain more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
Y. Bending shall be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending shall be approved.
Z. Cut ends shall be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.
AA. Conduits entering cold stores shall be made vapor tight, so that vapor from outside cannot
enter conduit.
BB. Draining: Arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest
point.
CC. Before wiring, conduits shall be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section of
system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position, and the raceway installation is
completed.
DD. Capping: Conduits shall be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.
EE. Conduit and fittings installed outdoors shall be watertight and highly resistant to corrosion.
Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with screw on covers and the
like.
FF. Terminations: Do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
GG. Length and radius of flexible conduit used for motors and vibrating equipment shall permit
bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
HH. Flexible conduit for slide rail mounted motor shall have sufficient slack to allow for
movement of motor over entire slide rail length.
II. Pulling Wire: Install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).
JJ. Standard elbows shall be used for conduit sizes over 40 mm. For smaller sizes, field bends
may be used provided no damage occurs to conduit.
KK. Tags: Fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit
and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the system.
LL. Non – ferrous conduit shall be installed for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
3.4 STEEL CONDUITS
A. Termination: Conduit entering sheet metal enclosure or outlet boxes, when not terminated in
a threaded hub, shall be securely held in place by two lock-nuts, placed inside and outside
enclosure, and terminated with an insulating bushing.
B. Running Threads: Do not use running threads at joints and terminations, but use 3-piece
unions or split couplings.
C. Additional threaded cuts on galvanized steel conduits shall be painted with zinc based
coating resistant to corrosion.
D. Damage to protective coating of conduits shall be repaired to original degree of protection.
E. Outdoor Mounted Steel Conduit: Apply anti-corrosion coating of zinc-chromate based paint
and two weather resistant finish coats of enamel, of approved colour, or other equal and
approved coating.
F. Galvanized conduit run in screed shall be painted with heavy coat of emulsified bitumen.
G. Galvanized steel conduits buried in ground or placed in wet or damp locations shall be
coated with two heavy coats of hot bitumen. Conduits shall be covered by at least 600 mm
of earth if buried in planting soil and by 300 mm if under walkway.
H. Plugs: Use hardwood or threaded iron plugs for blanking ends of steel conduit not used.
3.5 PVC CONDUITS
A. Coupling of conduit and/or termination into spouted fittings shall be made watertight and
permanent using special cement.
B. Termination: Connect conduits terminating in switchgear, fuse boards, trunking, adaptable

boxes or other non-spouted enclosures etc. with smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
C. Ends of conduit and conduit fittings shall be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
D. Semi-Permanent Adhesive: Use in joints requiring expansion couplers.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
E. Bends: Conduits not exceeding 25 mm diameter may be cold bent using bending springs.
Conduits over 25 mm shall be hot bent by an approved method.
3.6 EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Place conduits parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing
steel, between bottom reinforcing and top reinforcing steel. Fasten conduits to reinforcing
steel by positive wire, fasteners at the proper distance from the concrete face. Embedded
conduit diameter shall not exceed 1/3 of slab thickness. Special cases shall be referred to
Engineer.
B. Conduits in Partitions or Side Walls: Horizontal or cross runs shall be avoided.
C. Pull-boxes shall not be used except for concealed installations above false ceiling at
accessible locations. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located inconspicuously.
D. Conduits in floor of beds on grade: Encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50 mm or to

thickness allowed by architectural detail.
E. PVC conduits in reinforced concrete structures are generally to be installed after placing
reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or shall be placed in
grooves formed in the concrete, if approved.
3.7 EXPOSED CONDUITS
A. Conduits on walls shall be run neatly, horizontally or vertically.
B. Supports: Use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to expansion
sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting steel conduits shall be as per the latest edition of
IET Wiring Regulations BS7671.
D. Spacing of clamps or clips for supporting PVC conduits shall be as per the latest edition of
IET Wiring Regulations BS7671
E. Bends and Fittings: Firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of each
outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
F. Outlets: Do not run more than the permissible numbers of conduits to any surface wall
outlet.
G. Exposed conduit work shall be installed so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or
ventilation ducts or outlets.
3.8 CABLE TRUNKING
A. Installation: Secure trunking of all sizes at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. Joints shall
not overhang a fixing by more than 500 mm.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
B. Trunking passing through walls and ceilings shall have the cover fixed solidly for 25 mm
either side of walls and for 150 mm either side of floors and ceilings.
C. Trunking passing through fire barrier walls shall be provided with approved fire stopping
barrier inside the trunking.
D. Vertical sections of trunking over 900 mm long shall have staggered insulated tie-off studs
to support weight of cables.
E. Cabling Provisions: Separation of power, low current and control circuits shall be by two
channel trunking or by barriers inserted in trunking before installation of cables. Cable
retaining straps shall be provided at not more than 600 mm centers. Openings in front of
trunking shall facilitate drawing-in cables.
F. Coupling: Trunking parts shall be mechanically and electrically coupled without causing
abrasion to wiring.
G. Connection of trunking to conduits shall be through circular boxes.
H. Earthing: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Provide protective
conductor in accordance with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems" of the Specification.
B. Advise Employer and Engineer in advance of dates and times tests shall be performed on
cables.
C. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives
D. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.
E. Perform the following tests and inspections in coordination with the contractor as proper
and applicable:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protrusions in
cable trunking, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which
may cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trunking meet
specification and the approved Shop Drawings requirements. Verify that
communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by
barriers or are installed in separate cable trunking.
3. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in
the cable trunking.
4. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of trunking ventilation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
5. Visually inspect each cable trunking joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-
torque in suspect areas.
6. Verify that no corroded units are present.
7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found,
replace with specified hardware.
9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of metal cable trunking
grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to metal cable trunking. Test
entire metal cable trunking system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is
1 ohm.
F. Grounding: Do not use metal trunking as earth continuity conductor. Connect metal
trunking by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at maximum
30-m spacing.
G. Anchorage: Test pullout resistance for toggle bolts and powder-driven threaded studs for
each type and size of anchorage material.
1. Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales,
required for reliable testing.
2. Obtain Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90
percent of rated proof load for fastener.
H. Replace malfunctioning units and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
I. Prepare test and inspection method for Engineer’s approval. Submit test reports after
completion on site.
3.10 LABELING
A. All metal conduits and metal trunking shall be labeled with type of service, using approved
color and lettering labels, fixed at specified distances as specified in Division 26 Section
“Basic Electrical Material and Methods”.
B. Empty cable trunking to be labeled as empty provisional for the cables / wires that shall be
provided under the related Construction Package, as shown on the drawings.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer, that ensure coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.
3.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
3.12 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 260536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cable trays, cable ladders and related installations and accessories
necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, sub-feeders, branch circuit wiring and
wiring of low current systems, communications and signal cables. Supporting accessories
shall include but not limited to necessary carriage bolts with nut below head, roofing bolts
with nut, channel withstanding threaded rod, wall bracket, uni-strut, fish plate, washers, etc.
1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire stopping materials and

installation requirements.
2. Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for cable tray / ladder
supports not specified in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of cable trays / ladders and related

accessories.
2. Samples of each type of tray / ladder and accessory.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of cable tray / ladder, including plans, elevations,
and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements.
Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods,
splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, fittings and
earthing connections.
C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer/

D. Approved Third Party Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance with the IEC 61537 or
NEMA VE-1, as applicable.
E. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Include scaled
cable tray / ladder layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
F. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations to verify the following:
1. Loading capacities for supports.

2. Perforation base area for cable trays according to the specified Class.
3. Free base area for cable ladders according to the specified Class.
G. Factory Test: Submit Factory tests including safe working load, deflection tests and
measurement of steel and galvanization thicknesses.
H. Maintenance Data: For cable trays to be included in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01.
I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

cable trays in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 01.
J. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with the following standards:
1. IEC 61537.
2. ISO 1461.
3. ISO 12944-2.
As an alternative, cable trays in compliance with NEMA VE1 are acceptable.
A. Materials shall not be stored in damp and open environment and shall be stored in covered
places only.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Employer or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray / ladder with other installations to ensure
clear access to the cable trays to facilitate maintenance, checking and further pulling of
cables.
1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
1.8 FACTORY VISIT
A. Approved supplier’s manufacturing facilities of locally assembled products under this

Contract are subject to factory visit by the Engineer. Factory visit shall include checking of
quality assurance and factory’s capabilities along with witnessing of factory production tests
including but not limited to: safe working load, deflection tests, measurement of steel and
galvanization thicknesses, review calculations of perforation base area for cable trays and
free base area for cable ladders according to the specified Class. Visit program shall be
submitted for approval prior to the scheduled visit. Allow for visit expenses including
business class transportation and hotel accommodation as necessary for two persons from
the Engineer’s/ Employer’s side.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS
A. Cable trays and ladders shall comply with IEC 61537.
B. Cable trays shall meet Class C requirements for perforation free area as per IEC 61537 as a
minimum.
C. Cable ladders shall meet Class Y requirements for free base area as per IEC 61537 as a
minimum.
D. Components: To include cable trays or ladders (as shown on the Drawings), bends, elbows,
tees, couplings and plates, expansion plates, fishplates, rubber grommets, hangers, bracket
supports and other system accessories required for safety and protection of the cable
installations. All fittings and accessories shall be purpose made from the manufacturer. Field
fabricated fittings and accessories are not acceptable.
E. Trays: Provide to carry the maximum load of cables with a factor of safety in accordance
with IEC 61537.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
F. Trays: Heavy gauge perforated sheet steel, heavy duty, hot-dip galvanized after
manufacture, minimum 1.5 mm thickness for cable trays up to 300 mm width and 2 mm
thickness for cable trays exceeding 300 mm width, with outwards return flanges, as
applicable. Fittings shall be made of the same material as tray. Covers, where shown on the
Drawings, shall be minimum 1.0 mm thick for cable trays up to 600 mm width and 1.5 mm
thick for cable trays exceeding 600 mm width and shall be made of sheet steel hot-dip
galvanized after manufacture, snaps-on or bolt type, forming a rigid assembly with the tray.
G. Sides: sides’ height shall be 20 mm higher than the greatest cable diameter to ensure proper
ventilation and installation or 80 mm whichever is higher.
H. Trays Perforation: Cable trays perforation size and direction shall be properly designed to
suit cable ties or cleats to be used for cable fixation. Contractor shall submit method of cable
fixation for Engineer’s approval prior to installation.
I. Ladders: Hot-dip galvanized after manufacture, fabricated from 2 mm mild carbon steel.
Ladder side channels shall be minimum 125 x 22 mm, strengthened by reinforcing inserts
for torsional rigidity. Rungs shall be slotted to take cable cleats or ties and conduit clamps.
Rungs shall be minimum 50 x 25 mm channels, spaced at 300 mm centers.
J. Fully controlled, stringent pretreatment process including, alkaline de-greasing, rinsing,

pickling, fluxing and drying shall be carried out before hot dip galvanizing.
K. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with ISO 1461, applied after fabrication with local coat
thickness of 45 µm (local coating mass of 325 g/m2) and mean coat thickness of 55 µm
(mean coating mass of 395 g/m2). Cable trays manufactured to NEMA VE1 shall have
galvanization in accordance with NEMA VE 1 requirements.
L. Cable trays / ladders installed in corrosive atmosphere shall be provided with powder
coating over hot dip galvanization of high chemical resistant polyster / epoxy to meet the
requirements of the below classification. High bonding between the galvanizing and the
paint finish shall be certified by the manufacturer with a guaranteed life of 20 years.
1. For installations in outdoor industrial areas and coastal areas with moderate salinity
and indoor in swimming pools, chemical plants, coastal ship and boatyards; use
galvanization and powder coating in compliance with corrosion risk category C4 to
ISO 12944-2.
2. For installations in outdoor industrial areas with high humidity and aggressive
atmosphere and in indoor areas with almost permanent condensation and with high
pollution; use galvanization and powder coating in compliance with corrosion risk
category C5-I to ISO 12944-2.
M. Bolts and Screws: Cadmium plated or electrolytically galvanized.
N. Sizes: Trays and ladders shall be standard metric sizes, 150, 300, 450, 600 and 900 mm
wide, and at least 3 m length of section. Size of tray or ladder shall be determined by
number and sizes of cables in accordance with the Regulations and / or as shown on the
Drawings. Tray or ladder shall have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables
contained within. Deflection between supports shall comply with IEC 61537 requirements.
O. Earthing connector for trays or ladders shall be provided on each coupling between adjacent
sections.
P. Products shall be provided with stamped markings by manufacturers.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
Q. Cable trays and ladders shall be provided with galvanized ventilated sunshade covers when
installed in outdoor locations. Sun shade and fixings shall be from the same manufacturer of
cable tray/ladder.
R. Finish of the cable trays/ladders used outdoors shall be certified to be UV stabilized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable tray / ladder level and supporting system according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Spare capacity shall be minimum 15 % for vertical installations and horizontal installations.
C. Each run shall be completed before installation of cables. Submit calculations taking into
consideration the maximum cables load on cable trays with a factor of safety in accordance
with IEC 61537.
D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays / ladders. Fix trays / ladders using approved
suspension rods or uni-struts or angle brackets at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m and as per the
approved supports calculations.
E. Cables Fixation: Secure cables to tray / ladder with purpose made straps, cleats or saddles as
specified in Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"
and Division 26 Section "Medium Voltage Cables". Cable cleats and ties shall be correctly
sized and tightened to secure the cable without indenting the insulation sheath.
F. Cables Arrangement: Arrange cables in one layer only, with minimum spacing of one
diameter of the larger of the two adjacent cables or of a trefoil formation of single core cable
circuit, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
G. Cables Bending Radius: Cables installation on trays / ladders shall ensure that the minimum
cable bending radius as recommended by the manufacturer is not violated.
H. Cables Installation on Trays / Ladders: Use necessary rollers and pulleys at proper spacing
for installation of large and long run cables. Pulleys / rollers shall be fixed to structural
elements and not cable trays / ladders. Necessary pulling tools such as basket grips or
pulling eyes shall be used with a proper force and speed to ensure not exceeding the
manufacturer’s recommended maximum cable pulling tension.
I. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray / ladder and to
equipment. Support cable tray / ladder independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray / ladder on equipment enclosure.
J. Install expansion connectors where cable tray / ladder crosses a building expansion joint and
in cable tray / ladder runs that exceed 39 m, unless otherwise calculated by the manufacturer
and approved by the Engineer considering a maximum movement of 25 mm.
K. Make cable tray / ladder connections, changes in direction and elevation using standard
fittings. Fittings shall be properly curved / designed to satisfy the minimum bending radius
requirements and avoid sharp edges / corners.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
L. Locate cable tray / ladder above piping, unless accessibility to cable tray / ladder is required
or unless otherwise indicated.
M. Seal penetrations through fire zones or smoke barriers as specified in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
N. If cable trays / ladders are sized for future cables, furnish necessary provisions for
penetrations with capped sleeves for future cables through fire-rated partitions, or use
"repairable" fire stopping-penetration sealing material.
O. Workspace: Install cable trays / ladders with sufficient space to permit access for installing
cables. Minimum clearance of 200 mm shall be maintained between top of tray / ladder and
ceiling, beams and other services and between tray / ladders in multi-tier formation.
P. Barriers: Where tray / ladders carry conductors of different systems, such as power,
communications and data processing, or different insulation levels, such as 600V, 5000V,
and 20,000 V use separate cable tray / ladders. In case of absolute necessity, install
insulating barriers to separate the systems after obtaining the Engineer’s approval. Barriers
and spacing between system’s cables shall be in accordance with relevant codes, standards
and manufacturers’ recommendations.
Q. Install covers after installation of cable is completed.
R. Labeling of trays shall be provided at every change in direction and at every 12 meters on
straight runs. Size of letters and color of labels, marking and references shall be as per the
relevant standard regulations.
S. Cable trays/ladders shall not be installed in lengths below water/sewage pipes.
T. Electrical continuity strips / links shall be provided by the manufacturer of the tray/ladder.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays / ladders according to manufacturer's instructions.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.
3.3 WARNING SIGNS
A. After installation of cable trays / ladders is completed, install warning signs in visible
locations on or near cable trays / ladders.
cables.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
E. Perform the following tests and inspections in coordination with the contractor as proper
and applicable:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protrusions in
cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may
cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays meet specification
and the approved Shop Drawings requirements. Verify that communications or data-
processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in
separate cable trays.
3. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in
the cable tray.
4. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any
blockage of tray ventilation.
5. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and re-
torque in suspect areas.
6. Verify that no corroded units are present.
7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found,
replace with specified hardware.
9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify
that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for
continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.
F. Grounding: Do not use metal trays / ladders as earth continuity conductor. Connect trays /
ladders by flexible tinned copper straps to nearest bare earthing conductor and at maximum
30-m spacing.
G. Anchorage: Test pullout resistance for toggle bolts and powder-driven threaded studs for
each type and size of anchorage material.
1. Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales,
required for reliable testing.
2. Obtain Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90
percent of rated proof load for fastener.
H. Replace malfunctioning units and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
I. Prepare test and inspection method for Engineer’s approval. Submit test reports after
completion on site.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of cable tray / ladder installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer that ensure cable tray / ladder is without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
/ ladder manufacturer.
recommended by cable tray / ladder manufacturer.
3.7 LABELING
A. Cable trays and ladders shall be labeled with type of service, using approved color and
lettering labels, fixed at specified distances as specified in Division 26 Section “Basic
Electrical Material and Methods
B. Empty cable trays to be labeled as empty provisional for the cables that shall be provided
under the related Construction Package, as shown on the drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 260539 - UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Description of Work: Raceways including wireways and related installations and

accessories necessary to support and protect feeders, branch circuit wiring and wiring of low
current systems, communications and signal cables.
1. Division 3 Section "Structural Precast Concrete-Plant Cast" for precast concrete units
used as cellular concrete floor raceway.
2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for cellular metal floor raceway.
3. Division 7 Section "Sprayed-on Fireproofing" for fireproofing cellular metal floor
raceway.
5. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for receptacles installed in service fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturers' catalogues with specifications of raceways and related accessories.

2. Samples of each type of raceway and accessory.
3. Samples: Service fittings and flush outlet covers with required finish, for approval.
to, the following:
1. Exact routing with indication of boxes, accessories and expansion joints, size and
type of boxes.
2. Typical assembly details of installation etc.
3. Construction details of pull boxes.
4. Typical installation details including connection enclosure, connection of flexible
conduits, and earthing connections.
5. For prewired installations, submit drawings for approval showing the complete layout
of all products that make up the complete system for each floor prior to the
installation of raceway with the lengths, device type (power and data), locations and
circuits identified.

Project No. 20075
Rev: 0 Date: July., 2021 260539 - Page 1 of 4
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
C. Coordination Drawings: Include floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Identify
components and accessories such as expansion-joint assemblies, straight raceway lengths,
inserts, outlets, and fittings. Show underfloor raceway layout, connections between raceway
elements, and relationships between components and adjacent structural elements.
D. Record (As-Built) Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underfloor raceways,

junction boxes, and preset and after-set inserts. Include locations, types, and circuiting of
service-outlet fittings.
E. Maintenance Data: For underfloor raceways to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
1. Include detailed manufacturer's written instructions on locating preset inserts and on

installing after-set inserts.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain underfloor raceway components through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B. Comply with related BS Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of underfloor raceway products with structural work,
including slab reinforcement, and with floor finish work.
1. Coordinate height of preset inserts, junction boxes, access units, and raceways with
depth of concrete slab and floor fill.
2. Coordinate thickening of slabs where required for adequate encasement of raceway
components.
3. Coordinate exposed components with floor-covering materials to ensure fittings and
trim are suitable for floor-covering material furnished.
4. Revise locations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure
functioning layout, and as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING
A. Type: For installation in floor screed, laid on unfinished concrete floor, secured and grouted
flush with screed.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
B. Material: 3.3 m lengths of 2 mm thick (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel, protected by
corrosion resistant coating on inside and outside surfaces. Single, double or triple systems,
as required, are to be as shown on the Drawings. Dimensions are to be as indicated.
C. Openings: Ducts are to have 32 mm openings spaced at 600 mm with screw plugs for
receiving initial or future installation of outlet boxes. Screw plugs are to be replaced by
brass ferrules, inserted and securely fastened by crimping tool, for installation of pedestal
type outlet boxes.
D. Fittings: Ducts are to be supplied with approved standard manufacturer's fittings, couplings,
adjustable duct supports, duct to conduit adapters, horizontal 45 and 90 degree bends,
vertical 90 degree bends, terminal bushings to cabinets, cross-unders, offsets, plugs, ferrules
and complete set of tools for installation and maintenance after installation.
E. Junction Boxes: Flush, cast iron, or galvanized sheet steel or die-cast metal protected by
corrosion resistant coating and suitable for double or triple duct systems, as required, and
shown on the Drawings. Openings are to be provided for ducts and conduits. Interior of
boxes is to be partitioned for two or three services; completely isolating each duct system
and providing straight cross-junctions. Leveling and anchoring of boxes is to be by
adjusting screws at four corners. Flush cover plates are to form smooth surface with
flooring.
F. Flush Outlet Boxes: Factory designed, with accessories necessary to accommodate specific
outlets shown on the Drawings or cable outlets as required for signal or control services,
with cord-grip nipples.
G. Supports are to be capable of adjustment for height and arranged for maintenance of
alignment and spacing of raceways during concreting.
H. Recessed Service Fittings: Modular fittings that match with preset inserts and include
covers/ receptacles, outlets and associated device plates to provide service indicated at each
location. Covers are to be flush with floor and have a recess to match floor finish and level
with the area. Boxes' covers are to be firmly held in place and non-rocking. Coordinate
with architectural designs and materials approved for finishes and for electrical devices.
Internally mounted receptacle / outlets are to be as shown on drawings. Floor boxes where
in apartments shall be of pop-up type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of underfloor raceways. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install underfloor raceways as indicated on the Drawings, in compliance with the

Specification and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install raceways aligned and leveled and, unless otherwise indicated, parallel or
perpendicular to building walls.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
SYSTEMS
C. Arrange supports to attain proper elevation, alignment, and spacing of raceways. Install
supports securely at ends and at intervals not to exceed 1500 mm to prevent movement
during concrete pour.
D. Seal raceways, cells, and inserts to prevent water, concrete, or foreign matter from entering
raceways before and during pouring slab or placing fill. Provide tape or sealing compound
at joints as recommended by raceway manufacturer.
E. Remove burrs, sharp edges, dents, and mechanical defects.
F. Cap or plug boxes, openings, and open raceway ends.
G. Junction Boxes: Install tops level and flush with finished floor. Install blank closure plates
or plugs to close unused junction-box openings. Install boxes in place with grout to prevent
movement during construction. Install supports, couplings and locking and grounding
devices with screws tightened in accordance with raceway manufacturer's torquing values.
Remove burs, which may cause damage to insulation. Place top covers in inverted position
to prevent damage to surface of cover.
H. Install devices and service fittings at points of use indicated.
1. Cut; hole saw, and drill slab and raceways to allow wiring installation.
I. Install markers at each cell to identify service. Install markers flush at screed line before
pouring slab or placing fill. Extend marker with grommeted screw when floor covering is
placed. Do not extend through carpet. Install markers at inserts adjacent to junction boxes,
on both sides of permanent walls, and at end of each raceway run. Use slotted-head screw
to identify electrical power and Phillips-head screw to identify telephone.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground underfloor raceways and components.
1. Tighten connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation, clean underfloor raceways, including outlet fittings and devices, and
inspect exposed finish.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Level raceway components with finished slab and make adjustments for floor finishes.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric sensors, occupancy sensors, and multipole
lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual light switches.
3. Division 23 Section "Building Management System".
4. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting".
5. Division 26 Section "Exterior Lighting".
6. Division 26 Section "Panelboards".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting
control devices.
B. Samples: Occupancy sensors for color selection and evaluation of technical features.
C. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting control devices certifying that

products comply with requirements.
F. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
prices for three years of operation including warranty period. This price shall be valid for
three years from the date of the Substantial Completion.
G. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the spare
parts of the system shall be made available upon request at least 10 years from the date of the
Substantial Completion.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total
responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this
Section, in Division 26 Section "Lighting Controls,"
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components
specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match
components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Include
coordination with the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Panel boards."

2. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting."
3. Division 26 Section "Exterior Lighting."
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed including auxiliary
power and control units, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents
1. Provide 2% of installed quantity of normal occupancy sensors
2. Provide 2% of installed quantity of staircase and exit passageway occupancy sensors
B. The above mentioned list indicates the minimum spare parts required and shall be confirmed
by the manufacturer at the material submittal stage and submitted for Engineer’s approval.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing to

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the specified
warranty period
PART 2 - Warranty Period: 1 years warranty from the date of Substantial Completion. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all line voltage solid-state equipment.
2.3 TIME SWITCHES
A. Description: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display.
B. Description: Electromechanical-dial type.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Astronomic dial.
2. Two contacts, rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
4. Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip-day mode.
2.4 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS
A. Description: Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils
B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 37 673 lx, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn-off levels,
as described on drawings
C. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.
D. Indoor Ceiling- Units: Adjustable for turn-on/turn-off levels, installed flush with false ceiling,
calibrated to detect adequacy of daylighting in perimeter locations, and arranged to turn
artificial illumination on and off to suit varying intensities of available daylighting, as
described on drawings.
E. Shall be of fail-safe type: In the event of product failure, Return-to-Closed feature causes the
relay to default ON.
2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives control power from a separately mounted auxiliary
power and control unit, and operates power-switching contacts in that unit.
B. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives 24-V dc power from a remote source and, on sensing
occupancy, closes contacts that provide signal input to a lighting contactor inside the lighting
panelboard, as shown on drawings
C. Switch-Box-Mounting Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the live ac
circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts rated 1000 W at ac,
minimum.
D. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 30 minutes,
minimum.
2. Isolated Relay Contact: Operates on detection of occupancy or vacancy, as indicated,
to activate an independent function.
3. Occupancy sensors within staircase & exit passageway additionally include:
a. Manual Override ON Lighting Switch (S5): Low voltage (24V) momentary

switch, manually overrides ON the occupancy sensor of staircase regardless of

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
elapsed time delay. Switch finishes shall match that of Light Switch Type S3,
refer to Specification Section 262726.
b. Fail-safe operation: which in the event of product failure, Return-to-Closed
feature causes the relay to default ON.
c. Additional contacts: to interface with the building fire alarm system, so that the
lighting control device turns lights ON by fire alarm system activation.
E. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows:
1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament or
high-inrush ballast load, Secondary output 24V, 100mA minimum.
2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.
3. Self-contained transformer and relay
4. Zero arc point switching, to minimize relay contact wear from inrush currents.
5. Turns on and off load automatically based on occupancy sensor input or manually via
S5, local override switch.
6. Plenum rated, when installed above false ceiling used as return plenum.
F. Passive-Infrared Type: Detects occupancy by a combination of heat and movement in zone

of coverage. Each sensor detects occupancy anywhere in an area of 93 sq. meter, mounted at
height range from (2.4 to 3 meters ft.) and according to ceiling height by detecting occurrence
of 150-mm minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a minimum
target of 232 sq. cm to the sensor.
G. Ultrasonic Type: Emits a beam of ultrasonic energy and detects occupancy through use of
Doppler's principle in discerning movement in zone of coverage by sensing a change in
pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy.
H. Dual-Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive-infrared and ultrasonic detection

methods to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered.
Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or off)
is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
I. Wall mounted occupancy sensor is able to detect motion in 180 degrees’ angle covering the
specified area.
J. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensor is able to detect motion in 360 degrees’ angle covering
the specified area.
2.6 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held.
1. Current Rating for Switching: Consistent with type of load served, including tungsten
filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and

requirements in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit
for wall-mounting devices.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables" for low-voltage
connections and Division 27 Section "Voice and Data Systems" for digital circuits.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways
and Boxes."
C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
C. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
D. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six
months.
E. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
F. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational

conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional
observations.
G. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives
H. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.
I. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
J. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" and "Take Over
Procedures".
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to

three Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and
adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
SECTION 261200 - DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. Basic electrical materials and methods, section 260500 applies to work of

this section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all wiring devices
in accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers

of the types, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,

IEC 60076. Standards, pertaining to distribution transformers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for transformer including, size

enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings : submit dimensional layout on architectural background

drawings of transformer, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
2.2 GENERAL
A. The transformer shall be dry typecast risen designed, manufactured,

constructed and tested in accordance with IEC 60076
B. The electrical connections to other equipment shall be properly coordinated

to form a complete system (s) complying with this specification.
C. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer .These drawings

shall include fully dimensioned external and internal general arrangements
showing all principle dimensions, weights, foundation/cable/bus bar entry
details and the positions of all functional devices, schematic drawings
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
showing all windings, method of connection, terminal markings, and IP

rating.
D. Transformers in the context of this specification shall comprise assemblies of
a magnetic core, primary and secondary windings, supporting framework and
enclosure.
E. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning and

subsequent maintenance of all equipment and materials described in this
specification shall comply with the requirements of, the electricity at work
regulations and the IEE wiring regulations 17th edition.
2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
A. CORE CONSTRUCTION
1. The transformer core shall be built of lamination, comprising grain orientated

silicon sheet steel which is insulated on both sides. To protect the core
against corrosion and improve noise levels the core assembly shall be
coated after assembly with resin based paint.
2. The lamination shall be clamped at top and bottom by steel channels, which
are interconnected by vertical steel bolts. The bottom steel channels shall be
used to support the transformer and the top steel channel shall incorporate
lifting lugs.
3. The bottom core clamping channels shall be bolted to supporting steel cross-
channels placed at 90o to the transformer length, such that the whole unit is
stable and able to support the whole weight of the transformer with a safety
factor of two. Wheels shall be fitted to the cross-channels which shall be bi-
directional or steerable.
4. The supporting cross-channels shall be insulated from the core- clamping

channels by anti-vibration pads.
5. The core-clamping and supporting steel work after all forming, drilling and
shaping operations shall be thoroughly digressed and rinsed prior to
application of a zinc phosphate primer, rinsed again and finally coated with
an oven baked epoxy paint.
B. COIL CONSTRUCTION
1. Each transformer shall be a double wound type with both the M.V. and L.V.
windings individually. The coils shall be impregnated with quartz filled epoxy
resin and cast under vacuum, to produce a smooth finish without voids and
undulations.
2. The size and spacing of the conductors used in the windings shall be such
that the coils are self-supporting prior to impregnation and where applicable,
shall allow the epoxy resin to fill all of the space in and between adjacent
layers and turns.
3. The coefficients of expansion of the windings and epoxy resin shall not differ
by more than 15%.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
4. The windings shall be made of aluminium, utilizing round or rectangular

sections, or foil.
5. Cast resin material shall be fire resistance self existinguishing and type
tested according to IEC 60076-11.
C. MECHANICAL FORCED VENTILATION (AF)
1. Where specified mechanical forced ventilation shall be employed to further

cool the transformer windings and thus increase the performance rating
during short highly loaded periods.
2. The cooling system shall be automatically controlled by sensing the low

voltage top winding temperature.
3. The system shall comprise a number of single-inlet, single-width centrifugal

fans, each connected to a discharge duct situated directly below the
transformer coils, or axial fans, situated to direct the air flow through the coils.
4. Duct work shall be of sheet metal construction low pressure classification, or

of greater thickness to suit manufacturing procedures, or incorporated as part
of the base frame construction if required.
5. Ducts shall have discharge outlets, protected with metal mesh screens to
exclude debris, to correspond with core positions on each side. Ends shall be
capped.
6. Fans shall have spigot inlets, with 6mm protective wire guard, and flanges
outlets to connect to mating flanges on the air ducts, and joint to incorporate
a flexible gasket.
7. Fans shall be direct driven by an internally fitted external rotor type motor
with extended lubricators.
8. Each motor shall be supplied from a starter and shall be housed in a

purpose-mad cabinet also accommodating automatic control elements and
status indication lamps.
9. The duty of each fan shall be identical and selected so that the total quantity
of air delivered is sufficient to maintain the transformer temperature within the
specified limits.
10. Fans shall be type tested. Impeller shall be mild steel and of welded
construction, shaft height machined steel, bearings roller type or sealed for
life. Fan scrolls shall be of welded construction.
11. For shaft powers below 1kW stamped formed strip impellers may be used
provided required efficiency and balance grade can be achieved.
12. Where fan static pressure is less than 1kpa lock-formed joints and spot welds
may be used.
13. Fans and ductwork shall have a fully protective paint system to the same
standard as the core construction.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. INTERTURN INSULATION
1. High and low voltage coils shall be provided with very high integrity interturn
insulation to Class F, to withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses
under the specified operating conditions.
E. MOUNTING OF COILS
1. Coils shall be sandwiches between the core clamping channels but

separated from them by insulated support blocks. These blocks shall be
radially located top and firmly fixed to withstand vibration and absorb coil
expansions and contractions.
F. INSULATION CLASS
1. The insulation system for transformer shall be class F in accordance with

IEC 60076-11.
G. TYPE OF RESIN, FILLER ETC
1. The particular manufacturer's insulation system shall dictate the type of resin
and filler but the following guidelines shall be complied with.
- The resin shall ensure a minimum power frequency breakdown stress

of 10KV/mm when tested to IEC standard.
- The completed cast resin coil shall be self extinguishing in the event
of fire.
- Type test certificates are required to confirm the above.
2.4 PERFORMANCE
A. GENERAL
1. The transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60076 in respect
of partial discharge, impulse withstand short circuit strength.
B. RATED VOLTAGE
1. Unless otherwise specified the rated voltage class of the primary windings
shall be 22KV and secondary windings 0.4KV, at a frequency of 50Hz. The
windings shall be connected for vector group DYn 11.
C. THERMAL RATING
1. Transformers shall be designed and manufactured to operate continuously at

the nameplate rating, in an ambient temperature not exceeding 45oC and RH
not exceeding 85%, unless otherwise specified.
2. The manufacturer shall confirm any de-rating necessary, should the
transformers be required to operate in conditions exceeding those specified.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3. Transformers which are mechanically cooled shall have in increased thermal

range not less than 40% of the name plate rating.
D. LOSSES
1. Losses at no-load and loaded conditions shall be the lowest achievable for
the transformer type a specified by Electricity Distribution Co.,. These losses
shall be stated in the submittal.
E. NOISE LEVELS
1. The manufacturer shall confirm the guaranteed noise levels, Measurement

of sound levels shall comply with IEC 60076-10. The transformer shall be
provided with noise reduction support blocks in order to reduce noise level.
F. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
1. Transformers shall be protected by three medium voltage surge arrestors

installed inside the transformer enclosure.
G. ENCLOSURE
1. The transformers shall be installed inside enclosure and shall be provided

with doors for front and rear access.
2. The enclosure shall be provided with ventilation louvers, filters and fans for
proper ventilation of transformer
3. Transformer enclosure shall be designed to suit the location and anticipated

environmental conditions. This shall provide a degree of protection not less
than IP31.
2.5 HANDLING FACILITIES
A. LIFTING
1. Transformers shall be provided with permanently fitted lifting lugs or eye

bolts to facilitate handling by crane or hoist.
2. Transformers shall be equipped with jacking points to facilitate the removal

and or insulation pads.
3. The bottom supporting steel work shall be fitted with holes or have lugs
attached for the attachment of hauling apparatus.
B. FRAME WHEELS
1. Transformers shall be designed for floor mounting and be provided with

removable bi-directional or steerable rollers.
2. The rollers shall be lockable or means provided to prevent movement of the

transformers after installation.
2.6 CONNECTION FACILITIES

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. CONNECTION METHODS
1. Connection methods shall comply with IEC 60076. Provision shall be made
by the manufacturer for the mounting and connection of cable boxes and/or
busbars as specified for the M.V. and L.V. conductor connections.
2. Where M.V and LV cable boxes and/or busbars are specified these shall
generally be arranged on opposite sides of the transformer. However exact
positions shall suit the specified requirements of each individual situation.
3. LV cable terminations shall be kept separate from the M.V cable connections
and insulated to the specified voltage and able to withstand the specified
short circuit currents.
4. All M.V coil interconnections shall be insulated for the specified voltage, and
able to withstand the specified short circuit currents.
5. An earthing terminal shall be provide at a convenient point on the supporting

steel work. All steel work shall be bonded to the earthing terminal if it is not
electrically continuous. Provision shall be made for making an earth
connection to the neutral of the LV windings, should this be required.
B. TERMINAL MARKINGS
1. M.V. and L.V. winding terminals shall be clearly marked with characters in
accordance with IEC 60076. The characters shall be stamped or engraved
on securely fixed, durable and non-corrodible plates.
2.7 TAP CHANGING FACILITIES
A. TAP CONNECTIONS AND LINKS
1. Each transformer shall be provided with tapping on the M.V winding to cater
for supply voltage variations in the range ±2.5% and ± 5% in compliance with
IEC 60076.
2. Tap changing shall be effected by off-circuit tapping links.
3. A visible warning notice shall be fixed adjacent to the tapping links and
worded as follows:
"WARNING - OFF LOAD TAP CHANGING LINKS - ISOLATE

M.V AND LV SUPPLIES TO TRANSFORMER BEFORE OPERATION"
2.8 THERMAL PROTECTION
1. Each transformer shall be provided with a system of thermal protection and

temperature monitoring.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Temperature sensing thermistors shall be mounted in each LV coil as close

as practicable to its hot spot. The thermistors shall be wired back to an
electronic controller fitted on the transformer.
3. The thermistors shall be used to indicate winding temperature, and provide

alarm and trip indications, and to operate forced cooling fans and trip M.V
load break switches. Volt-free contacts shall be provided for relaying signals
to remote equipment.
4. Wiring from the thermistors to the temperature controller shall be carried out
with single core copper cables standards with LEF insulation. Cables shall be
contained in galvanized steel conduit supported from the transformer steel
work.
5. The temperatures at which the cooling fans shall be switched on and off shall
be adjustable within preset limits.
6. The power supply for the cooling fans shall be provided from the particular
transformer via a suitably fused switch. This switch shall bear the inscription
in yellow letters on a black background:
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS -

DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
7. The starter assembly for the cooling fans shall comply with this Specification.
A warning label shall be fixed adjacent to the main isolating switch bearing
the inscription:
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS -

DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
2.9 RATING PLATES
Rating plates shall be fitted complying with IEC 60726.
2.10 TESTING INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING
A. ROUTINE WORKS TESTS
1. Routine tests as called for in IEC 60076 shall be carried out on each
transformer at the manufacturers works in the presence of the Engineer.
2. The tests to be carried out shall include but not necessarily be limited to :
(i) winding resistance on nominal tapping

(ii) voltage ratio and vector relationship
(iii) load loss and impedance
(iv) no-load loss and current

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
(v) induced over voltage test at 2 times rated voltage
(vi) insulation resistance
(vii) partial discharge at 1.3 times nominal voltage.
3. The works tests shall comply with the requirements of this Specification.
B. TYPE TESTS
1. Type tests to IEC 60726 shall be carried out on a transformer to the same
design as the transformers detailed in the Tender. Test certificates shall be
supplied with the Submittals.
C. PARTIAL DISCHARGE TESTS
1. Partial discharge measurement shall be performed by the manufacturer in

accordance with IEC 60076.
D. FLAMMABILITY TESTS
1. The transformer manufacturer shall submit evidence of flammability tests,

carried out by an independent body to recognized international standards, on
a transformer of the same design during a simulated fire condition.
2. This information shall confirm that toxic emissions from the resin under fire
conditions do not exceed the specified level. The resin shall be self-
extinguishing once the fire condition is removed.
E. SITE TESTS
1. All site tests shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification.
2. After delivery to site each transformer shall be inspected in the presence of

the Owner's consultant, prior to installation.
3. After installation on properly prepared foundations each transformer shall be

tested and inspected in the presence of the engineer.
4. The M.V and LV winding connections shall be demonstrated as providing

the specified polarity and phase rotation and tap connections.
5. The M.V and LV windings shall be tested for continuity and insulation
resistance with a 1000 V insulation tester. The insulation resistance between
adjacent windings shall not be less than 100 M ohm.
6. After the M.V windings are energized, it shall be demonstrated that the
voltage and phase rotation at the LV terminals are as specified.
2.11 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENT - ACCESS
A. The specified transformers are located in the lower floor. This places
restrictions on the transformers' physical dimensions in case it is necessary

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
to remove/replace a transformer once the installation is handed over and in

use.
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the manufacturer's

transformer type selected could be removed/replaced (without incurring
builders work) with access through the tunnel.
C. Detailed dimensioned drawings proving removal/replacement in practical

shall be provided.
D. Each transformer shall be suitable for seimic 2A bolt down/chuking and anti-
sway bracing.
E. In addition, each transformer to includ : Diagram instruction plate, provision

for lifting, rolling and/or jacking equipment, earthing lug.
F. The audible sound levels not to exceed 77dB with force air fans operating.
2.12 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
M.V Supply system 22000 Volt

. Number of phases 3 phase
. Fault level (nominal design) 750 MVA
LV Supply system
. No-load voltage 400 V
. Number of phases 3 Phase
. Number of wires 5
. Rating (KVA) As indicated in drawings
Supply frequency 50 HZ
M.V winding connection DELTA
LV winding connection STAR
Vector group reference DYn 11
Impedance at 75oC 5% for rating up to 1000 KVA and 6% for

rating up to 2500 KVA
M.V Tapping (% of no-loads volts) ± 2.5% ± 5%
Secondary voltage at:

. Full Load 380 V
. No Load 400 V
M.V Insulation level 24 KV

. Impulse KV peak (1.2 / 50 US) 125 BIL
. Power frequency (KV RMS) 50 KV
Paint finish color Manufacturer Standard
Installation/space limitations Indoor - refer to layout drawing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which transformers are to be installed. Notify the

Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
Electricity Distribution Co. and local authority requirements to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of transformers with related
switchboards and other work.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values for equipment connectors.
D. Provide protective covering during construction.
E. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
F. Adjust fans when so furnished for free mechanical movement.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment, and after circuitry has been

energized, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new equipment and retest
at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Prior to energization of transformers and related distribution equipment:

1. With manufacturers approval, perform phase-to-phase and
phase-to-earth insulation resistance tests utilizing a megohmmeter
with minimum test voltage output of 5,000 volts DC with a minimum
resistance of 25,000 megohms. The test duration shall be for 10
minutes with resistance tabulated at 30 seconds, (1) minute and 10
minutes. Dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index will be
calculated.
2. Check transformers for continuity and for short circuits.
3. Notify Engineer of any abnormalities.
C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize transformers and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
D. Provide manufacturer's recommended DC high potential test for transformers

and verify acceptability of results prior to energizing.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS
SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 260500, applies to work of this
section.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, M.V switchgears
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgear of the

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and IEC
60529, Standards pertaining to M.V switchgears.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgears including sizes,

enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of

switchgear, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
2.2 22 KV SWITCHGEAR
A. GENERAL
The 22 KV switchgears shall be of the metal clad indoor type, type tested, completely
wired and tested at the factory, ready for installation when received on site. Site
work shall be limited to inter-unit wiring only.
The following parts of the equipment shall comply with the relevant I.E.C.62271-1
Standards specification regarding design, workmanship and testing.
1. Circuit-breakers (I.E.C. 62271-100).

Project No. 20075
Rev: 0 Date: August, 2021 261300 - Page 1 of 9
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Metering and protective C.T.'S (I.E.C. 60044-1).

3. Metering and protective V.T.'S (I.E.C. 60044-2).
4. Relays (I.E.C. 60255).
5. Disconnect & earthing switches (I.E.C. 60271-102).
6. High voltage fuses (I.E.C. 60282-2).
Precaution shall be taken at contacts between aluminum and other material to avoid
electrolytic action.
All circuit-breakers on the 22KV switchgear shall be interchangeable.
The switchgear shall be constructed so that it corresponds to the degree of

protection IP 42 according to IEC publication No. 60529.
B. SWITCHGEAR ARRANGEMENT (FOR ARRANGEMENT SEE DESIGN

DRAWINGS)
1. Following 22 KV switchgears shall be provided as indicated in the drawings.
- 22 KV switchgear for mains supply (fed from Cairo Electricity Distribution

Co.,).
- 22 KV switchgear for emergency supply (fed from diesel generator sets)
complete with synchronization / parallel operation panels and instruments.
- 22 KV ring main units for incoming cables from Cairo Electricity Distribution
Co., and feeding 22 KV switchgear for mains supply.
- 22 kV ring main units for the open loop ring distribution network.
2. The switchgear shall be of the metal clad indoor type, of size, rating and
arrangement as shown on Drawings and indicated in the Specification. The
complete assembly shall be floor mounted, free standing, with matching cases, to
form a continuous integral structure. The housing shall consist of folded sheet
steel sections welded together and shall be of robust construction Switchgear
shall have front and rear access.
C. Direct panel to panel busbar connection shall be made without the use of
interconnecting links.
D. The arrangement shall permit cables to enter from the bottom or top of the enclosure
as indicated on the drawings and connect at their respective terminals without
interference.
E. Cable termination shall be provided for incoming and outgoing feeders having 3-core,
armoured XLPE insulated, Aluminium or copper cables (for cross section area, see
drawings and schedules).
F. All wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchgear as
required, all groups of control wires leaving the switchgear with terminal blocks with
suitable numbering strips.
G. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchgear properly cleaned and finished
with electrostatic painting over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating suitable for the
climatic conditions of the site.
H. Engraved Nameplates: For feeder circuits including control fuses and for all
indicating lights and instruments, indicating item designation and circuit number as

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating; master nameplate giving
switchgear designation, voltage ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's
name, general order number and item number; feeder nameplates of the screw on
type, cardholders are not acceptable.
I. Bus bars’s connections shall be made of Silver plated insulated copper, rated for
continuous amperes as scheduled or shown and to withstand maximum short-circuit
stresses for a period of one second when connected to the 22 KV utility supply
system having a fault capacity of 750 MVA as indicated on the drawings at rated
voltage.
2.3 OVER CURRENT DEVICES
A. Feeder Protective Devices: SF6 or Vacuum type circuit breakers type with ratings as
shown on the drawings and have additional characteristics as specified.
B. Circuit - Breaker :
1. General Requirements
Circuit-breaker shall be capable of making, breaking and carrying the

specified load current continuously under on-site environmental conditions.
Circuit-breaker closing mechanisms shall be trip-free with momentary full

closing of contacts.
1.1 Independent Manually Charged Spring Operation
Closing of circuit-breakers shall be by independent charged spring

operation, springs shall be charged manually.
It shall be possible to charge the springs while the circuit-breaker is

closed, ready for the next closing operation.
1.2 Independent Motor charged Spring Operation
Closing of circuit-breaker shall be by independent motor charged

spring operation. A separate manual charging mechanism shall be
provided in case of supply failure. It shall be possible to charge the
springs while the circuit-breaker is closed, ready for the next closing
operation.
All auxiliary switches shall be wired to a terminal block on the fixed

portion of the switchgear, whether the switches are in use or not.
A positively driven position indicating device shall show the

appropriate contact position of the circuit-breakers.
An indicating device shall show the state of charge of the operating

springs.
A non-resettable operations counter shall be fitted.
1.3 A capacitor trip device shall be provided with the circuit breaker shunt
trip to ensure that energy will be available for tripping during fault
conditions. A control power transformer is required on the source side

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
of the circuit breaker. This control power transformer shall have

sufficient capacity to supply other AC auxiliary power requirements for
the switchgear.
2. Circuit Breakers (D/C type)
Circuit-breakers shall be single break with parallel main and arcing contacts
in a gas-filled sealed insulated enclosure. On opening, the main contacts
shall part first, transferring the current to the arcing contacts to minimize wear
on the main contacts.
Arc extinction shall be achieved without the use of external gas reservoirs.
Compressors shall not be used.
Circuit-breakers that operate with gas pressure above atmospheric, shall

incorporate a low pressure detector with alarm and/or lock-out facility as
specified in the schedules.
C. Disconnecters and Earthing Switches
Disconnecters and earthing switches shall comply with IEC standards.
Disconnecters and earthing switches shall be capable of breaking negligible current

but capable of carrying full fault current stated in the schedules for a minimum of 1
second.
The earthing switch must be of full making capacity in event of accidental closing on
a line circuit.
Interlocks shall be provided to prevent disconnecters and earthing switches from

being closed when the system is energized and to prevent disconnecters switches
being opened with the system is energized.
D. Each switchgear unit shall be provided with a metal rating and name plate giving the
required particulars in accordance with the IEC recommendations.
E. Instruments and meters shall be of the digital type flush pattern type with phenolic-
black finish.
F. Relays shall be microprocessor type with integrated metering and diagnostic LCD
display and equipped with RS-485 communication port.
Test terminal blocks shall be provided for all instruments, relays ...etc.
G. 22 KV switchgear for mains supply shall include the following:-
- Incoming Feeder Panels :
Shall be equipped with the following components :
a. One withdrawable, motor operated, circuit breaker rated 1250 A, with 750
MVA short circuit breaking capacity
b. One set of insulated copper busbars rated 1250 A and designed to withstand
electrodynamic forces under worst short circuit conditions of 750 MVA.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
c. Three current transformers each with separate secondaries for metering and
protection.
Accuracy class : CL 0.5 for metering
: 5P10 for protection
Ratio : 600/5/5 A
d. Three potential transformers, each protected by H.R.C. fuse, for metering and
protection.
Ratio 22000 / 110 / 110

3 3 3
e. One three phase non-directional over current relay. with instantaneous short
circuit element and definite time characteristic. Relay characteristic must be
coordinated with and approved by the electric distribution Co..
f. Three phase under voltage relay.
g. Earth leakage relay.
h. Phase sequence protection relays
i. Digital multimeter communicating type (currents, voltage, KWH, KVAR, KVA,

power factor, maximum demand, ….etc).
j. Auxiliary relay.
k. Earthing switch.
l. Space heater.
- Outgoing Feeder Panel :
Shall be equipped with the following components :
a. One withdrawable, motor operated, circuit breaker rated 630A, with 750MVA
short circuit breaking capacity.
b. One set of insulated copper busbars designed to withstand electrodynamic

forces under worst short circuit conditions of 750 MVA.
c. Three current transformers with separate secondaries for protection.
Ratio : 300/5/5 for outgoing

Accuracy class: CL 0.5 for metering
d. One three phase non-directional over current relay, with instantaneous short
circuit element and inverse characteristic.
e. Earth leakage relay.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
f. Digital multimeter (currents, voltage, KWH, KVAR, KVA, power factor,

maximum demand, ….etc).
g. Relay characteristic must be coordinated and approved by electric power

authority.
h. Earthing switch.
i. Space heater.
- Bus Sectionalizer Panel :
Shall be equipped with the following components.
a. One withdrawable, motor operated, circuit breaker rated 1250 A, with

750MVA short circuit breaking capacity.
b. One set of insulated cooper busbars rated 1250A, and designed to withstand
electrodynamic forces under worst short circuit conditions of 750MVA.
c. Three current transformers with separate secondaries for protection and

metering.
Ratio : 400/5/5
Accuracy class: CL 0.5 for metering
d. One three phase non directional over current relay, with instantaneous short
circuit element and definite time characteristic.
e. Digital multimeter (currents, voltage, KWH, KVAR, KVA, power factor,

maximum demand, ….etc).
f. Relay characteristic must be coordinated and approved by electric power

authority.
g. Earth leakage relay.
h. Space heater.
- DC System:
Provide DC system for the medium voltage switchgears and ring Main units
with adequate capacity of batteries, chargers and panel board required for
complete operative system.
H. For arrangement and ratings of other 22 KV switchgears refer to design drawings.
2.4 RING MAIN UNITS:
A- GENERAL:
a- For each ring main unit rating and arrangement refer to design drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
b- Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing, also
for the feeder to the 22 KV switchboard or transformers having the following
characteristics :
- Incoming and outgoing feeders, to be as used by the Electric Power

Distribution Company, coordinate with local power authority in this
respect.
- The 22 KV switchboard feeder, 3-Core, XLPE insulated armoured with

400 sq.mm or 240 sq.mm. Aluminum conductor.
c- Provision for CED metering must be provided complete with current and
voltage transformers hardwires necessary for KWH & KVARH metering
connections from incomers of 22 KV switchgear to RMU’s.
d- Outgoing SF6 or vacuum circuit breakers for ring main units shall be
withdrawable motor operated 22 KV, 630 A, 750 MVA short circuit breaking
capacity complete with current transformer and voltage transformers and
digital protective relay and measuring instruments.
e- The SF6 or vacuum circuit breakers shall be equipped to receive an external

voltage free tripping signal from over temperature protection control devices
installed at transformers.
B- TECHNICAL DATA:
The ring-main-unit shall fulfill the following data :
a. Type : SF6 gas insulated with

all main busbars to be housed in
SF6 gas insulated enclosure
b- Rated voltage : 22 Kv
c- Rated current :
- Ring main load break switches : 630 A.
d- Short circuit level : 750 MVA at 22KV.
e- Impulse withstand voltage

1.2/50 sec ( KV Peak) : 125 KV.
f- Rated insulation level, one minute

Withstand voltage, 1 min., 50 Hz. : 50 KV
g- Earth leakage indicator : Required
h- Space heater : Required
i- Current transformers : Required
j- Voltage transformers : Required
k- Digital multimeter : Required

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
(currents, voltage, KWH, KVAR, KVA,

power factor, maximum demand,
….etc).
For details of each type of RMU's refer to detailed design drawings.
C- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a- Nameplate: Mounted on the front door; in addition, mount a “Danger 22,000

Volts” sign in English and Arabic, on all doors providing access to medium
voltage ring main unit space.
b- Supply key interlocks as directed by the Utility Co.
c- Entire ring main units, medium voltage switchgears and voltage regulators to
be in complete compliance with the Utility Co’s. requirements and standards.
Obtain Utility approval of the ring main unit prior to fabrication and exact
location prior to installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed. Notify Engineer in

writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Factory tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works in the presence of the
Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchgear as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,

requirements of applicable standards, "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgear with other work.
C. Mount the switchgear assembly on floor steel aligning channels elevated above floor
level by a concrete pad. Provide shims to achieve level installation.
D. Insure that switchgear are shipped in sections which can be fitted through the available
structures.
E. Bond together the switchgear structure, sections and all conduits terminating at same
with a 120mm² bare copper earth cable and connect to the switchgear earth bus and to
the earthing loop as required. Provide conduits terminating at switchgear with Earthing
Wedges of the required size.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
G. Provide fuses of the ratings indicated, with one complete set of spare fuses for each
rating.
H. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
I Provide 6.0 mm minimum thick × 100 cm wide insulation mat in front of Medium voltage
switchgear, ring main units and rear of freestanding equipment and extend 100 cm beyond
ends.
J. Provide interfaces between circuit breakers, load break switches, relays, meters, ….etc
with BMS.
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test
equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and
replace with new equipment and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchgears:
1. Megger check phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulating resistance levels of

conductors.
2. Check switchboard for continuity and for short circuits.
C. Set all circuit breaker trip rating for maximum coordination with upstream and
downstream devices, including ground fault trips where supplied.
D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize equipment and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements.
E. Open and close load break switching devices under load.
3.4 PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training : Train Owner's personnel in procedures for

starting up, testing and operating M.V. switchgear and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three
operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions for the M.V.
switchgears.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT SWITCHBOARDS
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Main Distribution Board(s) work for low voltage (LV) distribution,
ancillary mounting frames, fittings, cable termination accessories and supports.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 23 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
C. Related Sections include the following:

2. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
4. Division 26 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".
6. For seismic parameters, PGA and building category, refer to structural
drawings/documents
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDB: Main distribution board.
B. CT: Current Transformer.
C. VT: Voltage Transformer.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. RMS: Root mean square.
F. The following terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and may
be used interchangeably: "Switchboard" and "Main Distribution Board".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards including
all components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the
Standards specified under "Quality Assurance" Article, equipment characteristics, details of
construction, operating data, dimensions and weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items
including incoming and outgoing feeder terminal arrangement, connections at busbars,
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices, indicating and metering instruments etc.
Boards shall be factory assembled and tested and shipped as complete package (s).
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Plans and elevations with indication of built-on equipment, exact dimensions, and
weights.
2. Arrangement of boards inside rooms allocated, indicating spaces and clearances.
3. Arrangement of equipment inside board.
4. One-line diagram of power system showing current ratings of switchgear and busbars
and types and locations of protective gear (relays, instruments, CTs, VTs etc.)
5. Schematics and wiring diagrams of control circuits. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
6. Foundation details and grouting holes installation details.
7. Arrangement of incoming and outgoing feeders, terminal fittings, instruments, busbar
connections etc.
C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

D. Technical Literature: Submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for equipment
manufacture:
1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and

characteristics, short- circuit ratings, time-current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short-circuit and earth-fault
currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective
short-circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references, including testing equipment for microprocessor
controlled trip units.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test records,
in accordance with the Standards specified in "Quality assurance" Article.
G. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
H. Manufacturer’s field service report.
I. Maintenance Data: For main distribution boards and components to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01 include
the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for main distribution boards and all installed
components.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
J. Coordination Study: Submit coordination study along with setting of protective devices for
overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated with upstream and downstream
systems based on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and specific
calculated prospective short-circuit currents at various points.
K. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
prices for three years of operation including warranty period. This price shall be valid for three
years from the date of completion of the project.
L. Guarantee to supply spares for the electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten years
from the date the equipment is made operational.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum five years of

successful installation experience on projects utilizing main distribution boards units similar to
those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of main distribution

boards, of types, sizes, and capacities required, and whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than five years.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the latest issue of:
1. IEC 61439-1 & IEC 61439-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies.
2. IEC 60947-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 1: General Rules.
3. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 2: Circuit Breakers.
4. Relevant IEC Standard for other components, where not otherwise specified.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable local regulations/code

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These will have precedence over other
codes/standards nominated for the project, unless otherwise approved in writing.
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Deliver
MDBs and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate
handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for MDBs
and components to protect equipment from damage. Inspect equipment to ensure that no
damage has occurred during shipment.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect
from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover main distribution boards to provide protection
from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing
and flammable materials from inside main distribution boards; install electric heating (250-

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
W per section) to prevent condensation.
D. Handle MDBs carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Remove
packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the use of excessive
hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment contained therein. Do
not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new.
1.7 WARRANTY

warranty period
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of main distribution boards and components with other
construction and electrical work, including conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces,
raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
A. Spare Parts: Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement
and/or one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the following:
1. One set of fixed and moving contacts for every type of replaceable (consumable)
contact set.
2. One operating motor and/or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs, control switches, and similar
devices subject to failure or breakage at any time.
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection
and maintenance and testing of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for type
of switchgear supplied.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.11 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. Factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed by the
Engineer for locally assembled equipment. Witness test shall include complete routine and
function testing on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted
for approval prior to test conduction. Allow for test expenses including business class
transportation and hotel accommodation as necessary for two persons from the Engineer’s/
Employer’s side.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Locally assembled products by one of the above approved manufacturers are acceptable
subject to compliance with design requirements and adequacy of reference list and quality
control of the local factory.
A. Generally: Main distribution boards shall be dead-front type, metal enclosed, multi-cubicle,
floor mounted, free standing, with 1000V rated insulation voltage, 600 V rated operational
voltage, and with 12 kV impulse withstand voltage, with fixed or draw-out switchgear,
manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings, with matching
vertical sections to form a continuous integral and rigid structure. Outgoing sections shall be
of equal width.
B. Generally: Coordinate with Building Management System (BMS) supplier and provide all
necessary interfaces, relays, transducers, etc, necessary for the functions specified in the BMS
schedules and/or shown on the Drawings.
C. General Construction: Rigidly framed and bolted, with Electro-galvanized sheet steel
enclosures, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with thermal
polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, gray colour (RAL 7035 ANSI 61) or standard
manufacturer’s colour subject to Engineer’s approval. Switchgear shall be vermin, dust and
rodent proof, IP 31 protection to IEC 60529 for indoor installations and IP 54 protection for
installations in wet areas and IP55 degree of protection for outdoor installations, with adequate
lifting means and base-frames and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to
floor without additional sills. For ratings up to 3200A, enclosures shall have mechanical
impact resistance of IK10 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree IP 54 and higher,
and IK08 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection degree lower than IP 54. Test certificates for
mechanical impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be
less than 1.5mm. For rating larger than 3200A, enclosures shall have minimum thickness of
2mm.
D. Ventilation: Compartments shall be ventilated, by approved methods complying with the

Standards.
E. Main Distribution Boards shall have a short circuit withstand current of the rating shown on
the Drawings for 1 sec.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Fastenings between structural members shall be bolted.
G. Extension of structure and busbars shall be possible at either end of switchboard for form 3
and form 4 type switchboards.
H. Arrangement shall permit incoming and outgoing busbars and cables to enter enclosure as
indicated on the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to
installation or maintenance.
I. Removing Circuit Breakers: Suitable arrangements and equipment shall be provided for
extracting, lifting and unloading switchgear from enclosures as appropriate for type of
switchgear.
J. Spare and space positions are defined as follows:
1. Spare position: Fully equipped enclosure with switchgear

2. Space position: Fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear.
K. Busbars: Site rated to same rating of main circuit breaker frame size as a minimum unless
otherwise shown on drawings, and braced for a symmetrical rms short-circuit duty as
specified. Busbars shall be copper, of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable
equipment temperature ratings, and not exceeding IEC 61439-1&-2 limits. Connections and
buswork shall be bolted with compatible hardware material as per manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance. Contact surfaces
shall be properly tin or Electro-silver plated as necessary.
L. Connections from busbar to switching element shall be rated to carry full continuous current
rating of switching element frame as a minimum, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
M. Main horizontal busbars and vertical distribution busbars shall be insulated unless bare
busbars are recommended by the manufacturer and used in the type test.
N. Full size neutral shall be continuous through all sections. Neutral bus shall be insulated and
separate from earth bus and connected to it with removable links, at every bus section. Links
shall be of the same cross-section of the earth bus.
O. Earth bus shall extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section in accordance with
the Regulations and Standards, complete with two main earthing lugs (one at each end), and
required number of feeder protective earth connectors.
P. Earth bus shall be half size of phase buses, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Q. Switchboard Type: Switchboard(s) shall be of the following type(s):
1. Form 3b. Except for Data Centre's Substation, Main Distribution Boards shall be of
Form 4b.
2. Incoming: Withdrawable type – Air Circuit Breaker (ACB).
3. Tie, where specified: Withdrawable type - ACB.
4. Outgoing: Fixed type Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) for ratings up to 1250A
and Fixed type ACB for ratings greater than 1250A.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
R. Withdrawable metal enclosed circuit breaker section shall consist of compartmented unit(s),
stationary part with rear busbar and cable connection compartments and front draw-out circuit
breaker assembly. Partitions between sections shall be bolted steel plate and partitions between
compartments shall be tough solid insulating removable bolted barriers. Each unit shall have
hinged lockable front door with grip-handle and door mounted instrumentation.
S. Drawout circuit breaker assembly shall have disconnecting contacts, wheels and interlocks to
prevent connecting or disconnecting circuit breaker unless in the open position, and to prevent
closing circuit breaker while racking into any of the three positions (connect, test, disconnect).
Racking mechanism and rail assembly shall be approved worm and lever mechanism. It shall
be possible to close the unit door with breaker in any of the three positions and when removed.
External position indicator shall be provided. Fixed disconnecting primary contacts shall be
accessible and replaceable from front and shall be silver plated copper. Moving primary
disconnect contacts shall consist of self-aligning, silver plated, spring pressure, finger-cluster,
copper contact fitted on line and load studs of circuit breaker.
T. Fixed main circuit breaker section shall individually accommodate main circuit breaker, main
cable entry with terminal fitting assembly and metering compartment. Where placed against a
wall, accessibility shall be possible from front and sides or only from front of section.
U. Pull Sections: An additional cable pull section shall be provided, depending on actual
configuration shown on the Drawing, and subject to Engineer’s approval.
V. Where busway is used as an incoming or outgoing feeder of the switchboard, the switchboard
manufacturer shall provide all necessary accessories as recommended by the busway
manufacturer such as adaptor box for the switchboard to be able to accept the busway flange.
The contractor is responsible for coordination between the two manufacturers.
W. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite
or Aluminum with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.
X. Switchboards shall be rear accessible unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings; front, rear
or front and rear aligned as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer,
individually mounted fixed MCCB or ACB distribution sections, with compartmentalized
construction, consisting of front modular circuit breaker compartments, busbar system
compartments and rear cable termination compartments unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, with insulating barriers between front
compartments and busbar compartments and between rear compartments and busbar
compartment (removable for maintenance). MCCBs shall be closely coupled to busbars (to
minimize chances of bus-side faults), and to rear cable terminals, through compatibly frame-
sized insulated connectors. MCCB modules shall be covered on the front, by recessed frame-
type bolted covers, 1.5 mm minimum thickness, to protect circuit breaker handles. Top, sides
and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around.
Y. THDi and THDv at the main distribution board section of each transformer (Point of Common
Coupling) shall not exceed 10% with 8% individual harmonic order and 5% with 3%
individual harmonic order respectively. Necessary supporting calculations based on actual
nonlinear loads including VFD, UPS, lighting ballasts, etc. and all other linear loads on the
same transformer shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval. In case the specified harmonic
limits cannot be achieved, the contractor is responsible for achieving the specified limits by
providing necessary filters on MDB bus. Adopted solution shall be submitted for Engineer’s
approval prior to implementation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
Z. All main distribution boards shall be equipped with combined Class I + II surge protective
devices as specified under Division 26 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Circuits". SPDs along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be integrated within or
adjacent to the MDB’s enclosure.
2.3 AIR-BREAK METAL ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER (ACBs)
A. Type: Enclosed in steel structure, air ventilated, air break, for normal operation at maximum
temperature within enclosure at point of application, tested to approved standards, manually
operated for normal functions, and automatically tripped under over-current conditions. Trip
power shall be derived from main power circuit, with sufficient tripping energy to reliably trip
circuit breaker. Fixed mounted circuit breaker shall be rear connected.
B. Construction: Manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the Drawings,

with two-step, spring charged, stored energy mechanism, quick-make, quick-break type,
electrically and mechanically trip-free, to prevent maintaining circuit breaker closed against
over-current condition whether under manual or automatic operation. Electrically operated
circuit breakers shall have integrally mounted, spring charging motor mechanism
automatically recharged upon closing. Both manually or manually and electrically operated
circuit breakers shall have mechanical built-in charging lever and shall include open and close
direct acting push buttons. Stored energy provision shall allow open/close/open sequence of
operation without use of external energy. Circuit breaker shall have arc-quenching device on
each pole and replaceable arcing contacts.
C. Control Power: For electrically charged circuit breaker and/or for shunt trip device, where
required, control power shall be 110V or 120V AC as recommended by the manufacturer
obtained from in-built MDB control power transformer connected and fused on line-side of
circuit breaker. Where shunt trip and/or under voltage release are required, a sufficient
capacitor trip device to cover any temporary loss or excessive drop of supply voltage shall be
provided.
D. Rating: 3-pole, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. With continuous current rating
(frame size) as shown on the Drawings, ranging between 1600 A and 5000 A (1600, 2000,
2500, 3000, 4000 and 5000 A), fully rated (100%) for service under worst site conditions.
Breakers shall be rated for a symmetrical rms service short-circuit breaking capacity as shown
on the Drawings, to IEC 60947-2 sequence II (rated service short-circuit breaking capacity)
at specified voltage and frequency, meeting IEC 60947-2, sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for
circuit breakers of utilization category B), tested in an enclosure substantially the same as the
enclosure in which they shall be installed.
E. Trip Unit: Totally enclosed, programmable, solid state device, interchangeable for compatible
frame sizes, pluggable into front of circuit breaker, tamper-proof and with transparent,
sealable cover. Trip unit shall measure sinusoidal and non–sinusoidal current wave forms
(fundamental to thirteenth harmonic) by continuously sampling each phase through out every
cycle. Trip unit shall be direct acting trip device, current transformer operated, with flux
transfer shunt trip that requires no external power. It shall have adjustable current setting (0.5
- 1.0 times trip unit rating) with adjustable long-time delay up to 24 seconds, short-time pick-
up and short-time delay, earth-fault pick-up and time delay instantaneous over current pickup.
Current setting range shall be by means of replaceable trip-units within the maximum frame
size rating. Once removed, circuit breaker shall remain in the trip-free position. Earth-fault
trip shall be adjustable, range 10% to 60% of normal current rating of the circuit breaker and a
maximum of 1200A, with adjustable time delay between 0.1 and 0.5 seconds. Short time delay
shall be adjustable in steps, 2 - 9 times current setting, with adjustable time delay having
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
maximum delay of up to 0.4 seconds. Instantaneous trip shall be adjustable in steps at least 2
– 13 times the trip unit rating. Over-ride protection shall allow full sensitivity up to interrupting
capacity of circuit breaker. Slight difference in setting ranges according to manufacturers
standard products may be accepted subject to engineer’s approval.
F. Trip Unit Status Display: Shall indicate in words the status of normal breaker operation, long
time over current pick up, instantaneous time over current trip, short time over current trip,
ground fault trip. Unit shall have integral resetable counter to count long time, short time,
instantaneous and ground fault trips.
G. Position Indicators: Positive with trip indication target. Target indicator shall be mechanical
and shall give indication even when control power has been lost.
H. Trip unit shall have inputs from conventional potential transformers for every phase. Current
sensors transformers for every phase. Current sensors shall be encased in epoxy filled plastic
housing to protect against damage and moisture and shall be integrally mounted in breakers.
I. Neutral current transformer: Provide on the neutral conductor of each main, tie or outgoing
circuit having earth fault protection, located after the link connecting neutral and earth busbars
from load side. Rating and characteristics of the neutral current transformer shall be suitable
for proper operation of the earth fault protection system.
J. Circuit breaker accessories shall include the following:
1. Padlocking or keylocking provisions for all positions (disconnected, test, connected,

closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, short-circuit, and ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and reset button
4. Operations counter.
5. On/off pilot lights.
6. Shunt-trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. Bell alarm for remote overcurrent trip indication.
K. Auxiliary Contacts: Include N.O. and N.C. contacts on switchgear as required for remote
monitoring and control, plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. spare contacts.
L. Electrical Interlock: If electrical interlock is required between power air circuit breakers (as
shown on the drawings), the mechanical closing button of the circuit breaker shall be disabled in
the connect position and an additional electrical push button shall be provided for the
closing of the circuit breaker through the breaker’s shunt close coil. The electrical interlock
shall be provided on both shunt trip and close coils of the circuit breaker in order to perform
simultaneous tripping and inhibit closing functions on the interlocked breaker.
2.4 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, , totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal
operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided
with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main
contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole breakers
shall have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles. Ampere rating
shall be clearly visible. All terminals shall be box lug or clamp type with set screws, suitable
for copper or aluminum conductors.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. MCCBs shall be 100 A minimum frame size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
C. MCCBs generally shall be thermal-magnetic type for ratings below 250 A frame size, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. MCCBs 250 A and larger shall be electronic solid-state
trip type. All circuit breakers shall be 3-pole unless otherwise shown on drawings.
D. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: shall have bi-metallic inverse time delay over-
current element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element for
operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 150/160 A shall
have adjustable instantaneous trips.
E. Electronic trip circuit breakers shall have solid state trip units with long time delay setting
range at least between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating with adjustable time delay up
to 24 seconds, short time delay range 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with maximum
clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times
continuous rating. Solid state trip units shall be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature
between -20 and +55 deg. C. Earth fault protection shall be provided or built into trip unit
where specified or shown on drawings, and shall be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal
phase current pick-up with maximum time delay of 0.2 seconds, and shall be suitable for
connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button shall be provided on cover for
testing the trip unit. Short time over current protection is only required for circuit breakers
630A and above.
F. Deration: Thermal and electronic over-current trips shall be ambient temperature derated at
specified ambient temperature whereby the ratings of protective devices included in the design
drawings consider the rated current of the circuits in the assembly shall not exceed 80
% of the rated conventional free air current rating in accordance with IEC 61439-1. In case of
adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment shall not exceed maximum trip rating shown
on the Drawings. MCCB shall not be derated if the space where the switch boards are installed is
air-conditioned.
G. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so

that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic
operation. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching devices of
metallic grid construction.
H. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is
set to operate.
I. MCCBs: MCCBs frames rated 800 A and above shall have utilization category B (with an
intended short time withstand capability), and shall have rated service short circuit breaking
capacities (sequence II) with suitably selected frame sizes and trip ranges to meet the electrical
requirements at the distribution panelboard location and schedules shown on the drawings,
with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%) of the ultimate ratings as quoted by
the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit breaker rating plate. MCCBs frames
up to 630 A shall have utilization category A with rated ultimate short circuit breaking
capacity (sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the switchboards locations.
J. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker shall assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
K. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal magnetic circuit breakers of 150/160 A frame size shall have
interchangeable trip units.
L. Sealing: Non-interchangeable trip circuit breakers shall have sealed covers. Circuit breakers
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
with interchangeable trips shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.
M. Accessories: Circuit breaker design shall allow addition of open / close electrical motor
operator, control and interlocking functions, under-voltage release, shunt-trip coils, alarm and
auxiliary switches, padlocking devices, key-lock devices, and the like.
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. Generally: Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for flush installation.
Scales and markings shall be protected and sealed. Accuracy of instruments shall be within
2% unless otherwise specified.
B. Voltmeters: Digital type,, range 1.25 times nominal system voltage, with “400 V voltage”
indicator LED.
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: enabling measurement between phases and between phase and
neutral.
D. Ammeters: Digital type, range 2 times nominal circuit amperage.
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76 x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated primary
current, core size and accuracy shall be determined in accordance with nominal current of
plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
H. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and secondary
fuses and disconnecting device.
2.6 DIGITAL METERING UNITS

A. Metering unit shall be provided on the incoming and outgoing feeders having the following
functions for each phase:
1. Voltage.
2. Current.
3. Frequency.
4. Energy.
5. Total power.
6. Peak power demand.
B. The metering unit shall be provided by adequate interface link with the BMS system.
2.7 DIGITAL VOLTAGE RELAY

A. This unit shall be provided on the incoming and coupler section to perform the following
functions, for connection to the automatic transfer system and monitoring by BMS system:
1. Over-voltage (adjustable from 90 to 120%, with time delay adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec).
2. Under-voltage (adjustable from 75 to 95%, with time delay adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec).

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3. Phase Voltage unbalance (detect voltage unbalances over 10%).
4. Phase reversal.
2.8 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring shall be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections shall be made at front of terminal board and with no live metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be connected, by bare copper
conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed for multi-
core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables shall be used in
proximity to higher temperature components and as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each termination.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Anti-condensation heaters with disconnect switch and pilot lamp shall be provided in
switchboard, controlled by thermostat and/or hygrostat.
B. Schematic and wiring diagram shall be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive main distribution boards for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Notify Engineer in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install main distribution boards as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable requirements
of applicable standards or codes approved.
B. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers’ drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for passage
of cables etc. are provided as required.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from main distribution board units and components.
D. Cable Trenches: Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of power

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
and control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
E. Built-in Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which shall be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable trenches or
building structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
F. Equipment: Install on concrete bases etc., and assemble completely plumb and level, before
grouting in holding-down bolts.
G. Supports and Terminations: Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cable ends and
termination fittings required for power and control cables.
H. Relays: Set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with an

approved scheme.
I. Make Good damage painted surfaces, clean and apply rust-inhibiting prime coat and two
finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by
Engineer.
J. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for main
distribution boards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic
plastic. Mount on front of main distribution boards.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Main Distribution Board Nameplates: Label each main distribution board compartment with
engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for main distribution boards with ground continuity to
main electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values and / or recommendations. If
manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in applicable Standards.
A. Equipment: Inspect equipment upon delivery to Site and report any damage to the Engineer.
B. Switchgear: Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types, sizes,
and wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
C. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer’s torque

tightening specification.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Tests: After installation and before hand-over, carry out all visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical tests required by the governing codes and any other tests the Engineer may
require to check compliance of installation with the Specification, including, but not limited
to, the following. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. All testing to be
witnessed/certified by manufacturer as acceptable results.
1. Insulation resistance tests for each main distribution board bus, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Continuity tests of each circuit.
3. Operational tests.
E. Test Procedure: Conform to the following:
1. Protective Device and Relay Settings: Verify that settings given on the Drawings are
appropriate for final system configuration and parameters based on system study.
Where discrepancies are found, recommend final settings for approval before making
final adjustments.
2. Submit short circuit and coordinated relay settings with calculations based on IEC from
the medium voltage incomer to the final load.
3. Load unbalance to be based on DEWA values.
4. Load shedding program to be developed by identifying the nonessential loads for
generator or turbine loading as applicable.
F. Main and Control Circuits: Using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range), check insulation
resistance between phases, between phases and earth/enclosure and between neutral and earth.
G. Primary Injection Tests: Provide portable test equipment to test time-delay characteristics of
circuit breakers by simulating an overload or fault condition. Measure and record all test
results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.
H. Instantaneous Trip Elements: Test by high current primary injection, using high-current
primary injection test-sets and reports all readings.
I. Routine Tests on Site: Carry out on every main distribution board in accordance with the
Standard specified (IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-2) for FBAs assembled from standardized
components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine tests are also to be carried out
on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by the Engineer.
J. Manufacturer/authorized representative shall install and certify “equipment ready for

energization”
K. All test record certificates shall be clear, having a distinctive test certificate number, signed
and certified by authorized testing agency, contractor and Engineer.
L. Adjust system for optimum automatic power-factor correction as per DEWA Regulations.
M. Conduct site test with Oscilloscope after loading of the MDB to demonstrate that harmonic
filters function properly as specified.
N. Re-test: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of main distribution boards.

Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance

personnel in the following:
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
3. Schedule training with the Employer for a minimum of 2 days, including theoretical
information and practical training, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - Page 1 of 15

MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT PANELBOARDS
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Panelboards for distribution and sub-distribution of electric power and for protection of
circuits, including fixing and supporting materials and materials for termination of feeders,
sub-circuits and branch circuits for the following types:
1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

2. Distribution panelboards.
3. Metering Cabinets.
B. Connection to BMS system, including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as
detailed in Division 23 Specification Sections BMS schedules and /or shown on the
Drawings.

2. Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for
aluminum cables termination requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
B. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
C. MCS: Molded Case Switch.
D. LP, PP: Final branch circuit lighting & power panelboards respectively, for secondary
lighting and power distribution with outgoing miniature circuit breakers (MCB) protection
on branch circuits and miniature isolator on main incoming, as shown on the Drawings.
E. DB: Apartment Final branch circuit panelboards for lighting and power distribution inside
apartment with outgoing miniature circuit breakers (MCB) protection on branch circuits and
miniature isolator on main incoming, as shown on the Drawings.
F. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCS on main incoming and
outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type 1 or Type 2.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
G. Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied from emergency

source are prefixed with the letter “E” if supplied from emergency source, and with letter
“U” if supplied from UPS source.
H. EDB shown on the drawings shall have the same specifications as DPs.
I. MC: Metering Cabinet.
J. ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker.
K. RMS: Root mean square.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected.

2. Types of panelboards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and deration
at specified ambient conditions and corresponding temperatures within the
enclosures, MCB shall not be derated if the space where the panels are installed is air-
conditioned.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panelboard.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short- circuit series combinations of
circuit breakers.
B. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine test
records in accordance with the Standards.

D. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact composition of each panelboard, indicating busbar rating, frame and trip ratings
of circuit breakers.
2. Typical installation details of panelboards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and
materials used.
3. Exact composition of each metering cabinet, indicating the locations and dimensions
of the transparent windows, arrangement and dimensions of internal cable / wiring
management trunking and locations of power sockets and data outlets provisional for
Ethernet gateways.
E. Coordination Study: Submit coordination study along with setting of protective devices for
overload, short-circuit and earth-fault currents as coordinated with upstream and
downstream systems based on specific coordination curves of protective devices used and
specific calculated prospective short-circuit currents at various points.
F. Details of Electrical Closets: Submit details to verify clearances, spaces and ventilation of
the installation of proposed equipment, prior to starting construction.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES

with requirements.
H. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards submit final versions after load
balancing.
I. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 01 and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements. In addition
to requirements specified in Division 01 include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over-current protective

devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over-current
protective device.
J. A metering cabinet sample including all specified provisions shall be submitted for the
Employer’s / energy metering Supplier’s review / approval. This sample shall be opted from
the metering cabinets included in the design package in coordination with the Employer.
K. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
L. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
spare parts of the system shall be made available upon request at least 10 years from the
date of the Substantial Completion.
A. Comply with
1. IEC 61439-1 & IEC61439-2 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
Assemblies".
2. IEC 61439-3 "Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies - Distribution
boards intended to be operated by ordinary persons (DBO)".
3. IEC 60947-1 "Low Voltage switchgear and control Gear- General Rules".
4. IEC 60947-2 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - circuit breakers".
5. IEC 60947-3 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units circuit breakers".
6. IEC 60947-4-1 "Low Voltage switchgear and control gear - Contactors and motor-
starters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters".
7. IEC 60898-1 "Miniature circuit breakers".
8. IEC 61009 "Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent
protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs)".
9. Other components where not specified shall comply with the relevant IEC standards.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.6 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction
that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of
equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B. Contractor shall ensure complete coordination and discrimination of the circuit breakers
with the upstream and downstream LV protection devices up to the short circuit level at the
point of the installation, in coordination with other involved Packages Contractors where
deemed necessary , in accordance to design intent taking all required measures like circuit
breakers frame upgrade at no extra cost.
1.8 SCHEDULES
A. Schedules shown on drawings indicate the designation and required type of panelboard
using the following criteria:
1. Type of construction (MCB or MCCB), referring to type of branch circuit breakers.

2. Voltage, number of phases and wires.
3. Branch circuit breaker trip rating and wire size.
4. Main circuit breaker trip rating and frame size (maximum continuous rating) for
MCCB and MCB.
5. Short-circuit interrupting capacity (IC) in kA.
6. Special arrangement or provisions.
A. Local factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed
by the Engineer for locally assembled equipment in the presence of Original Equipment
Manufacturer. Witness test shall include complete routine and function testing on all units to
be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for approval prior to test
conduction
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents:
1. Keys: 2 spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock, 1 key to be installed on
panel with a chain (Excluding apartments' panelboards).
2. Indicating lamps: 2 percent of the number of lamps used, with a minimum of 1 of
each type and colour.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3. Control fuses (where required): 5 percent of the total quantity of each rating used,
with minimum of 1 per type.
4. Contactor Coils: 5 percent of total quantity of each type, with a minimum of 1 per
type.
5. Push Buttons: 2 percent of the number of push buttons used, with a minimum of 1 of
each type.
B. The above-mentioned list indicates the minimum spare parts required and shall be
confirmed by the manufacturer at the material submittal stage and submitted for Engineer’s
approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. Locally assembled products by one of the listed approved manufacturers are acceptable
subject to compliance with design requirements and adequacy of reference list and quality
control of the local factory.
A. Rated insulation voltage shall be in accordance with the respective standards.
B. Panelboards shall be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 31 for indoor
installations, in accordance with IEC 60529, and shall be factory designed and assembled.
C. Earthing bar shall be half size the phase busbars.
D. Neutral bar size shall match the size of the neutral conductor of the incoming cable as
shown on feeder data schedules.
E. Protection shall be fully rated throughout the systems.
F. Circuit breakers shall be non-fused type.
G. Circuit Breaker Arrangement: Panelboards shall have one main incoming circuit breaker or
switch and the required number of branch circuit breakers, arranged as shown on the
schedules, including spare circuit breakers and spaces for future expansion. Three-phase
panelboards shall be designed for sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices.
H. Branch Circuit Numbering: On 3-phase panelboard schedules, circuits 1 and 2 shall be

connected to L1 (Brown "BN") phase, 3 and 4 to L2 (Black "BK") phase, 5 and 6 to L3
(Grey "GY") phase etc.to conform to branch circuit numbering, as shown on the drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES
A. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
B. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, shall be Electro-galvanized sheet steel of
gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints shall be
galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces shall conform to the standards, adequate for the
utilized cables/wires subject to the Engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100 mm on
all sides. Enclosure shall have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support and
adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
C. Trims shall cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to
form a dead front panel. Trims shall be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps
engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable).
Screws where used shall be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims for flush mounted
panelboards shall overlap box and front shields by at least 20 mm. Trims for surface
mounted panelboards shall be exactly sized to form flush fit to box.
D. Doors shall have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock
and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high shall have vault-type handle and multiple point latch
mechanism. Locks shall be keyed alike.
E. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. Shall be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and
alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of
Engineer, except where used inside apartments, panelboards shall be powder-coated white
to match apartments' walls, and the final approved finishes and colors to be subject to
Architecture / ID Engineers' Approval.
F. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, shall be

provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are
specified. Directories shall be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of load.
G. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite
2.4 BUSBARS
A. Type: One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, tin-plated, based on total maximum
operating temperature of 90 deg C at any point of the bus, at full continuous rating. Bolted
or clamped contact surfaces shall be properly tin or silver plated as necessary, and shall have
maximum current density not exceeding requirements of the approved standards.
Aluminum shall not be used for busbars or panelboard parts.
B. Design: Busbars shall be rigidly designed so that branch circuit devices can be removed
without disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or
tapping. Busing shall be full size without reduction. Busing and blank plates shall allow
installation of future circuit devices, where indicated on the drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Main busbars shall be bare busbars unless insulated are recommended by the manufacturer
and used in the type test.
D. Rating: Busbar rating shall be at least equal to upstream circuit breaker frame size..
E. Short-circuit Duty: Busbars shall carry at least 100% of the maximum short-circuit level at
point of application for one second, without showing any signs of degradation.
F. Terminals and connections shall be anti-turn, solder-less screw-pressure type. Screws and
bolts used for making copper/copper connections shall be hard copper alloy with lock
washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
G. Neutral bar shall be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solder-less box type
set-screw connector shall be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit and one bolted
clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main incoming neutral wire.
Neutral shall be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
H. Earthing bar shall be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure connector
for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing conductor, to
provide secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and enclosure.
2.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. Type: Tested to approved standards, , totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from high
quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for normal
operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and provided
with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation of main
contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current conditions. Multi-pole
breakers shall have common integral trip bar for simultaneous operation of all poles.
Ampere rating shall be clearly visible. All terminals shall be box lug or clamp type with set
screws, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
B. MCCBs shall be 100 A minimum frame size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
C. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, moulded
case circuit breakers of final branch circuit panel boards (LPs & PPs) shall be thermal
magnetic type, while moulded case circuit breakers of distribution panel boards (DPs) shall
be thermal magnetic for frame sizes up to 160 amperes and electronic type for higher frame
sizes.
D. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: shall have bi-metallic inverse time delay over-
current element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element
for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers rated 160 A shall
have adjustable instantaneous trips.
E. Deration: Thermal and Electronic over-current trips shall be ambient temperature derated at
specified ambient conditions and corresponding temperature within the enclosures whereby
the ratings of protective devices included in the design drawings consider the rated current
of the circuits in the assembly shall not exceed 80 % of the rated conventional free air
current rating in accordance with IEC 61439-1. MCCB shall not be derated if the space
where the panels are installed is air-conditioned.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Electronic trips units, applicable to circuit breakers 250 A frame size and larger, shall be
solid state with long time delay settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating,
short time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time
of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating.
Solid state trip units shall be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and
+55 deg C. Earth fault protection shall be built into trip unit where specified, and shall be
suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-to-trip button shall be provided on
cover for testing the trip unit. Short time over current protection is only required for circuit
breakers 630A and above.
G. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation so

that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or automatic
operation. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-quenching devices
of metallic grid construction.
H. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload element is
set to operate.
I. MCCBs for LPs, PPs and DPs Type 2: Comply with IEC 60947-2 test sequences I, II,
utilization category A, and shall have rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacities
(sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at the panelboard location, with preferred
ratings in accordance with following tables.
J. MCCBs for DP Type 1: MCCBs frames rated 800 A and above shall have utilization
category B (with an intended short time withstand capability), and shall have rated service
short circuit breaking capacities (sequence II) with suitably selected frame sizes and trip
ranges to meet the electrical requirements at the distribution panelboard location and
schedules shown on the drawings, with declared ratings as percentage (100%, 75% or 50%)
of the ultimate ratings as quoted by the circuit breaker manufacturer marked on the circuit
breaker rating plate. MCCBs frames up to 630 A shall have utilization category A with rated
ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (sequence III) to meet the electrical requirements at
the panel boards locations with preferred ratings in accordance with the below tables.
K. Frame size is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range listed below and which shall be related to
minimum acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting
duties: normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
L. Frame sizes are generally to be selected with minimum interrupting capacities at specified
voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the following table:
Thermal-magnetic
15-100 or 160 (1,2p) 18 - - 220/240
15-100 or 160 (2,3,4p) 18 - - 380/415
15-160 (2,3,4p) 35 60 100 380/415
Electronic
100-250 (2,3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415
160-400 (3,4p) 35 60 150 380/415
250-630 (3,4p) 40 60 150 380/415
320-800 (3,4p) 50 60 150 380/415
500-1250 (3,4p) 50 70 150 380/415

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
M. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker shall assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
N. Interchangeable Trips: Thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers of 160 A frame size shall
have interchangeable trip units.
O. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units shall be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units shall have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
P. Accessories: Circuit breakers shall be designed to accommodate standard attachments

including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm switches, and
open / close electrical motor operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and
over. Padlocking devices shall be provided, where shown on the Drawings.
Q. Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection (RCBOs)

type A to IEC 61009 are provided as add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where
required and as shown on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to
over-current and short-circuit protection, shall be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip
current sensitivity on breakers for branch circuits shall be as shown on the Drawings], and
for main breakers ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers shall include
current transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to
ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
R. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without fusible elements. When
operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current shall be less than 1/2
cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker
construction.
S. Current limiting circuit breakers shall have, on each pole, adjustable inverse time-delay
over-current characteristics for overload protection and instantaneous trip for short-circuit
protection. Operation of main contacts shall be based on Electro-magnetic repulsion forces
between contacts created by fault current. Ratings are specified at rated voltage for an rms
value of prospective short-circuit current.
2.6 MOLDED CASE SWITCHES (MCSs)
A. Molded Case Switch: Similar to circuit breakers but without overload/short circuit
protection. Short time rating of switches shall not be less than twelve times the maximum
rated operational current for 1 second. Switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. Switches
shall have utilization category AC-22B to IEC 60947-3.
2.7 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
A. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 60898-1.
B. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities to IEC 60898-1 shall be as follows:
1. 6 - 125A MCB
2. 10 or 15 kA at 220/240 - 380/415 V A.C, as shown on drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Construction: MCBs shall be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up to 70

degree C within panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and shall be constructed
from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and
characteristics shall be submitted for temperatures at and above 40 deg C.
D. MCBs and combination devices shall be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting to a standard din rail.
E. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping shall provide close protection of
insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip shall operate at 5 - 10
times normal rated current (Curve C). Magnetic operation shall be in the current limiting
region and opening time shall not exceed 5 milliseconds.
F. Ratings: Preferred rated currents shall be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 and 125
A, calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. De-rating above 40
deg C shall not exceed 1% per deg C and loading shall be 100% of circuit breaker rating.
G. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers shall be add-on
devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA and 300 mA shall be available for all ratings of 2-pole and
4-pole circuit breakers.
H. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, shall include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which shall be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.
2.8 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (DPs)
A. DP Type 1: Form 1 to IEC 61439-1&-2, and have a minimum rated insulation voltage of
750V and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage, free standing , with doors (unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings), suitable for ratings of main breaker and busbars ranging
from 630 A to 1250 A, 3-phase, 4-wire (or 3-wire where specifically indicated), suitably and
orderly arranged for any selected combination of branch MCCBs ranging from 150/160 A to
1250 A frame size and short-circuit interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings. Circuit
breakers smaller than 250 A frame size, where indicated, may be grouped on an integral
sub-assembly mounted to main chassis.
B. DP Type 2: Form 1 to IEC 61439-1&-2, and have a minimum rated insulation voltage of
690V and with 8 kV impulse withstand voltage. Panelboard shall be recessed or surface
mounted type, as shown on the Drawings, complete with trim and door, adjustable trim
fixation for flush panels, and with ratings of main circuit breaker and busbars up to 400 A,
3-phase, 4-wire, with 2 or 3-pole branch circuit breakers, 100 A or 160 A or 250 A frame
size.
C. Construction: Sheet steel, for cabinet/box; suitable for mechanical impact resistance of IK08
to IEC 62262 with enclosures protection degree IP31. Test certificates for mechanical
impact shall be submitted for approval; otherwise enclosure thickness shall not be less than
1.5mm. Fronts shall be single or twin covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live
ends.
D. Interior of panelboard shall be pan assembly consisting of galvanized sheet steel chassis,
folded, flanged and reinforced, and mounted on molded insulators.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. Molded insulators shall have minimum temperature rating of 130 deg C and insulation grade
of 3.5 kV for one minute.
F. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in twin arrangement (except for larger circuit breakers)
and bolted rigidly to copper cross and center bus connectors.
G. DP incomer shall be MCS with rating equal to the ampere trip of the incoming circuit
breaker, as shown on drawings.
H. Metering Instruments: Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal cases for
flush installation. Scales and markings shall be protected and sealed. Accuracy of
instruments shall be within 2% unless otherwise specified.
1. Voltmeters: Digital type, range 1.25 times nominal system voltage, with “400 V
voltage” indicator LED.
2. Voltmeter Selector Switch: enabling measurement between phases and between phase
and neutral.
3. Ammeters: Digital type, range 2 times nominal circuit amperage.
4. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
5. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5 A. Rated
primary current, core size and accuracy shall be determined in accordance with
nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit level and burden.
6. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with primary and
secondary fuses and disconnecting device.
2.9 FINAL BRANCH CIRCUIT, POWER AND SUB-DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

- GENERALLY
A. Arrangement: Comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile and
base, and one main circuit breaker or switch as shown on drawings. Single and multi-pole
circuit breakers or other devices shall occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of
contactors and split-bus arrangement or other devices shall not change regularity of standard
box width.
B. Indoor Enclosure: Sheet steel, minimum 0.8 mm thick for box/cabinet and minimum 1.5
mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim shall be adjustable to allow
for mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces (gutters) shall be at least
100 mm wide. Larger gutters shall be provided where tap-off insulated split connectors are
required. Knockouts shall be provided in top or bottom of enclosures and shall provide a
neat and uniform conduit/cable terminal arrangement.
C. Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a for LED lamps and class AC 3
for motors to IEC 60947-4, and rated not less than overload setting of protective device
upstream. Contacts shall be double break, silver cadmium plated, having self-cleaning
wiping action. Control shall be provided by phase-neutral (maximum 230 V) split-coil, for
on/off activation by local and/or by remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons and selector
switches, as shown on panelboards schedules. Contactor shall be mechanically latched.
Control circuit shall be fused. Auxiliaries shall include local pilot light, parallel remote
indicating circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.10 FINAL BRANCH PANELBOARDS - TYPE MCB
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating of 500V as a minimum.
B. Internal Assembly: Comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid construction,
attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and provided with
DIN rails in horizontal symmetrical multi-row arrangement. Assembly shall be complete
with all necessary components for supporting DIN rails (including mounting plates), DIN
mounted neutral and earth terminal blocks / busbars, dead front plate for protection against
direct contact of live parts and one piece insulated bolt-on/comb-type phase busbar for
internal wiring & power connections. Insulation shall be high thermal rating, capable of
carrying maximum short-circuit current for one second without overheating beyond
acceptable limits required by the Standards. Panelboards shall comply with IEC 61439-3.
C. SPN type panelboards shall be suitable for 240 V maximum service voltage, single-phase
and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming double pole miniature
isolator.
D. Single-pole MCBs for 240 V service, shall have trip ratings between 6 A and 125 A, with
ICs as required in the Schedules.
E. TPN type panelboards shall be suitable for up to 415 V A.C. maximum service voltage, 3-
phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 pole miniature isolator main
incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the Drawings.
F. Triple-pole branch circuit breakers shall have trip ratings between 6 A and 125 A, with IC
as required in the Schedules.
2.11 SMART ENERGY METERS
A. Smart tenants’ and landlord’s energy meters along with all meters’ control cables and
Ethernet gateways shall be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the Employer.
B. Contractor scope of work shall include all necessary provisions / works required for the
proper installation, all in coordination with the Employer and Energy Meters’ Supplier, as
detailed in Division 26 Method of Measurements and on drawings.
2.12 METERING CABINETS
A. Metering cabinets are deemed to accommodate the Smart Energy Meters, Ethernet
Gateways along with their power supplies / adapters, provisional power socket and data
outlets, etc. as indicated on drawings.
B. Cabinets shall include transparent windows to allow for the reading of the energy meters
without the need for cabinets' doors opening as indicated on drawings.
C. Cabinets shall be provided with internal thermoplastic cable / wiring management trunking
to house the energy meters incoming and outgoing power cables, as well as the
interconnecting RS485 cables and the outgoing M-bus cables, whereby:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Dimensions of the internal cable / wiring management trunking shall be according to

the exact number and size of accommodated power and control cables with the filling
factor ratio of 40%.
2. Trunking shall have slots and knockouts to enable power and control cables
connections to the energy meters and Ethernet gateways.
D. Energy meters' cabinet shall be of custom made tailored to accommodate the exact number
and dimensions of the energy meters as well as the exact location of the Ethernet gateway,
where the following cabinet provisions shall be carried out in coordination with the
Employer / energy meters' Supplier to avoid any conflicts during installations:
1. Locations & dimensions of transparent windows, where energy meters shall be

installed flush with these transparent windows.
2. Arrangement & dimensions of internal cable / wiring management trunking.
3. Locations of power sockets and data outlets provisional for Ethernet gateways.
E. Cabinets shall be provided with all necessary fixations, accessories and terminations to
guarantee secure, neat, trouble free and proper assembly and operation of the energy meters’
equipment inside the cabinets.
F. Type: General purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, surface mounted as
shown on the drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved manufacturer's
standards and sizes.
G. Construction: Box, trim and doors where required, shall be Electro-galvanized sheet steel of
gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the standards. Welded joints shall be
galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces shall conform to the standards, adequate for the
utilized cables/wires subject to the Engineers’ approval and in no case less than 100 mm on
all sides. Enclosure shall have pre-designed angles or threaded end studs to support and
adjust mounting of interior panelboard assembly.
H. Trims shall cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus compartments, to
form a dead front panel. Trims shall be fixed to cabinet/box by quarter-turn clamps
engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of box is not acceptable).
Screws where used shall be oval-head, countersunk and flush. Trims shall be exactly sized
to form flush fit to box.
I. Doors shall have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder lock
and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high shall have vault-type handle and multiple point latch
mechanism. Locks shall be keyed alike.
J. Finish: Inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. shall be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid and
alkali solvents, grease, aging and corrosion and of standard gray color to the approval of
Engineer.
K. Directories under glassine, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, shall be

provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors are
specified. Directories shall be typed to identify the metering cabinet and clearly indicate
energy meters’ references.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fixing Generally:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panelboards to structure.

2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panelboards at least 25mm from wall ensuring
supporting members do not prevent flow of air.
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panelboards.
4. Close unused openings in panelboard cabinets.
B. Panelboard Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have
been completed.
C. Wiring Inside Panelboards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on
circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections shall be split and bolted type, fully insulated.
D. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush with
wall surface finish.
E. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1800 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
G. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing
panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
H. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.
I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
J. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: if asked by the engineer, stub four empty
conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling
space in the future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on
grade.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main

electrical ground bus.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
B. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panelboards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within panelboards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
cables.
G. Circuit Breakers: Tests shall include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report
ambient temperature inside enclosure.
H. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings, using
500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on
systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
I. Equipment shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits, and grounds and
meggered to assure adequate resistance.
J. Routine tests on site shall be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
K. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3. Test each ELCB for trip sensitivity and trip time for 3 times and provide weighted
average value.
4. Adjust protection settings for circuit breakers as per the approved coordination study.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
L. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
M. Install layout drawing/DB schedules/panel drawings inside laminated rigid folders in each
panelboard.
N. Testing certification formats provided herein are for guidance only. All test certification
shall clearly indicate the acceptable values of the test results as per the relevant regulations.
In case this is not clearly defined, identify the manufacturer recommendations.
O. Correct malfunctioning installations at Project site, where possible, and retest to

P. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as per requirement of system
fault study, to achieve discrimination up to the short circuit level at that point co-ordination
as per IEC 60947.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES GENERAL
SECTION 262500 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes busway assemblies and fittings.

2. Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for bus
drop cables.
3. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for circuit breakers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting position, mounting

method, vertical supports, materials, firestops, and weatherstops for each component.
B. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of enclosed bus assemblies including
plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other construction
elements. Detail connections to switchboards, transformers, panel boards and other
electrical equipment. Detail supports and connections to building.
D. Coordination and Construction Drawings: Include floor plans and sections to show enclosed
bus-assembly layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
Indicate and certify field measurements.
E. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of the system with the relevant
Standards.
F. Supporting System: Submit the following:
1. Detail supporting system, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported equipment.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
G. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

enclosed bus assemblies, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 01.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
H. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed bus assemblies to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements.
J. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
K. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus-assembly components and fittings through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B. Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-6.

2. IEC 60529.
A. Deliver, store, and handle bus assemblies according to Standards recommendations.
B. Products shall be suitably rated for Project conditions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of busway with other installations.
1. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Hook stick operator for plug-in units.
approval.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.8 WARRANTY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL
A. Busway shall be Plug-in type for tap off applications as applicable and / or shown on the
Drawings, indoor, complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories
where indicated and as required for a complete, functioning and safe installation.
B. Busway shall include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, switchboard flange, elbows,
offsets, cable tap boxes, transformer flange connections with flexible copper braid link, ,
power take-off sections, phase transposition, expansion joints, end closures, supports, and
other components and accessories needed to form complete systems, and as shown on
drawings.
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements for neutral and
ground conductors as indicated and specified.
D. Busway Conductor Material: aluminum alloy, 56% minimum conductivity.
E. Busways: silver plated at connections for aluminum and insulated over entire length, with
flame retardant 130 deg C class epoxy insulation.
F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not to exceed limits specified in the Standards which the
busway is designed to at any point in the busway when busway is operated at rated load
current and system frequency.
G. Current Densities of Busway Conductors: current carrying capacities of Busway at site

maximum ambient temperature conditions as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods" shall not exceed the following:
1. 1.75A/mm2 for aluminum conductors rated below 2000A and 1.55A/mm2 for
Aluminum conductors rated 2000A and above.
2.3 BUSWAY
A. Type: Indoor, 600 V grade L-N, 3-phase, 5-wire (3P+N+E) for all plug in type busways,
insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of compact design to provide degree of
protection of IP40 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the Drawings at site maximum
ambient temperature conditions. Neutral shall be half sized the phase conductor, also the

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
internal earth bar shall be half sized the phase conductor without considering the
contribution of the enclosure as earthing means. Short-circuit capacity shall be certified by
an approved third party and shall be at least equal to the value at the upstream point of
connection at the incoming cable end boxes (as shown on the Drawings) for 1 second.
B. Construction: Prefabricated, insulated flat aluminum alloy conductors, totally enclosed, non-
ventilated, sandwich type. Housing shall be bonderized inside and outside and finished with
gray baked electrostatic paint, unless otherwise proposed by the supplier and approved by
Engineer. Busbars shall be provided with extra insulation between busbars and housing
along the full length. Joints between sections shall have special insulation, flanged and
pressure bolted, easily dismantled and giving equally strong mechanical connection to
busway sections. Any section of the busway shall be removable without disturbing adjacent
sections. The busbar joint shall be of an approved type assembly, to maintain proper
pressure over a large contact area.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall be silver plated and arranged in
joint stacks incorporating busway conductors, and each joint stack shall be arranged for
tightening with a single bolt. Joint design shall be such that any length or fitting of a run
may be removed without disturbing the connecting lengths.
D. Reactance: Busway shall be specially built and assembled to provide low reactance.
E. Accessories: Busway shall be complete with necessary factory made adaptor boxes, junction
boxes, bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as may be required to provide
complete system between terminal points indicated on the Drawings. Fixing and mounting
materials shall be galvanized steel. For vertically mounted busways, spring suspension type
hangers shall be used for equalizing weight of trunking between all supports.
F. Cable Tap Boxes: Busways connected to cables at either ends or at plug-ins shall be
provided with cable tap boxes to connect electrical cable to the busway distribution system.
G. Terminal adaptors or chambers shall be factory made. Coordinated components at both ends
shall match equipment connected thereto. Connections shall be made with insulated copper
bars of equivalent sections and of exact shapes to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring
washers. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the two manufacturers.
H. Busway shall be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and shapes. Busway
cutting on site is not acceptable.
I. Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3 m (10 ft)
length of busway. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
J. Phase Transposition: Busways intended to change the relative positions of the phase
conductors in order to balance the inductive reactances or to transpose the phases shall be
provided with phase transposition unit.
2.4 PLUG-IN DEVICES
A. General: Compatible with the connected busway and of types as indicated. Plug-in devices
shall be equipped with spring reinforced contact fingers arranged so they will not make
contact with busways during plug insertion until the device housing is positively earthed to
the busway. Plug-in devices shall be locked in position mechanically and make positive
earthing contact before to the power connection when in the fully inserted position. Safety
interlocks (releasable) shall be provided on busway plugs having "on" and "off" positions to
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
prevent insertion or removal of unit when the circuit breaker is in the closed position,
prevent opening the cover when the circuit breaker is in the closed position and to prevent
closing the circuit breaker when the cover is opened. Alignment tabs shall be provided to
prevent the plug-in device from being installed 180o out of position. Mounting hardware
shall be captive on bus plug housing.
B. Plug-in units (tap off units) shall be of rating shown on the Drawings, and comprise circuit
breaker made by same manufacturer of the busway, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, complete with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No cables are permitted for
connection of the breaker to the busway stabs. Circuit breakers shall be as specified in
Division 26 Section "Panelboards".
C. Contractor shall ensure complete coordination and discrimination of the circuit breakers
included in tap-off units with the upstream and downstream LV protection devices up to the
short circuit level at the point of the installation, in coordination with other involved
Packages Contractors where deemed necessary, in accordance to design intent taking all
required measures like circuit breakers frame upgrade at no extra cost.
2.5 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: as recommended by busway manufacturer and conforming to Division 26 Section

"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: Adjustable for leveling and spring tension and
arranged to permit relative movement between floor and busway.
C. Rigid Floor Supports: Adjustable for leveling.
D. Expansion Section: Capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busway section.
Arranged to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.
E. Fasteners to connect busway supports to the building structure as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: All steel spring head type.
3. Powder Driven Threaded Studs: Heat treated steel, designed specifically for the
intended service.
2.6 FIRE STOPPING
A. General: Materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers. Refer to
Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" and Division 07 Section
"Penetration Fire Stopping".
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: Sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close fitting to
busway arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busway penetration.
C. Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant matching the type used during the fire resistance
in building penetrations test in accordance with IEC 61439-6.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install busways and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable requirements
of applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions except
where more stringent requirements apply, where Manufacturer / authorized representative
shall provide all required installation support and inspection of busways.
B. Installation should not commence until areas are watertight and clean
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with tightening torques specified in the approved applicable standards. Tighten
joints again after bus assemblies have been energized for 30 days.
D. Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assembly crosses building expansion joints.
Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed 90 percent
of manufacturer's recommended distance between fittings for the type and material of
busway installed.
E. Fire Stops: Install fire stops where busway penetrates fire rated walls and floors. Seal
between busway and opening and around opening with sealant or sealing mortar having fire
rating not less than that of the penetrated wall or floor. Comply with Division 07 Section
"Penetration Fire Stopping".
F. Weather Seal: Install integral weather seal where busway penetrates exterior wall or roof.
Provide appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather tight.
G. Floor Penetrations: Provide a minimum 100 mm (4-inch-high) curb around busway

penetrations of floors to prevent water from spills and leaks from contacting busway.
H. Support busway from the building structure independently from other suspended items.
1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection, spacing, and installation

of supports.
2. Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate to
support busway load multiplied by a safety factor of three
3. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
4. Support bus assembly with not less than 10-mm steel rods for horizontal installations
and with spring supports for vertical installations, unless otherwise by the
Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
5. Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
I. Fastening Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the building
structure as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
J. Support at Connections to Equipment: Where busways connect to equipment, provide

flanged fittings fastened to the busway and to the equipment. Support the busway
separately. Do not carry the weight of the busway on the equipment enclosure.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
K. Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,

connection, and closure, where deep clean shall be guaranteed before covers are fitted.
L. Ensure installation operative are suitably trained to install the busway systems. If necessary,
arrange training and support from manufacturer.
3.2 EARTHING
A. Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busways as indicated and
specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
B. Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques specified in
applicable Standard or to assure permanent and effective earthing.
busways.
C. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the
Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation with specified
requirements.
D. Tests: Tests shall be witnessed and certified by manufacturer’s authorized representatives, as

acceptable for results.
E. Organization of Tests: Provide all labor, materials and instruments required for tests.
F. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives
G. Test busway runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
1. Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busway, and
connected equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase continuity from
source to equipment.
2. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busway components with 1000 Volt d.c.
megohmmeter and compare in report with manufacturer's stated acceptable values.
Measure each phase to phase and each phase to earth. Any reading should be better
than 100 megohm.
3. Complete Visual Inspection. Check torque. Mark torqued nuts. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Energize busway and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
I. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest. Verify that
equipment meets the specified requirements.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
J. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
K. Equipment shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits, and grounds and
meggered to assure adequate resistance.
L. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
3.4 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR
A. Upon completion of installation of busways, remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and
repair damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.
B. Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the

manufacturer.
C. Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT
A. Align busway runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists. Provide support
stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is excessive movement.
B. Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings against connected loads and revise as required to
conform to recommended values.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion perform an infrared scan of
bus assembly including joints and plug-in units.
1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device
calibration.
2. Perform two follow-up infrared scans of bus assembly, one at four months and the
other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.
3. Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and
scanning observations after remedial action.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training.
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
up and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and
schedules.
Maintenance Data."
advance notice.
4. Provide service manual.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets, automatic
and manual lighting control equipment, outlet boxes and plates, etc.
B. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.

2. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for boxes.
3. Divisions 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for
building wiring.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and special
features, as applicable for each item.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout drawings,
with box and equipment types and sizes.
2. Installation details of special devices including wall station with pre-set scenes, etc.
3. Wiring diagrams of special items.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
E. List of recommended spare parts and extra materials, and their prices for three years of
operation including warranty period. This price shall be valid for three years from the date of
the Substantial Completion.

Project No. 20075
Rev: 0 Date: August., 2021 262726- Page 1 of 11
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the spare
parts shall be made available upon request at least 10 years from the date of the Substantial
Completion.

with requirements.
A. Comply with related Standards.
B. Lighting switches shall comply with IEC 60669-1.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 2 % (with minimum of one each) extra materials for all products that match those
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Employer.
A. Deliver materials to site in unopened cartons or bundles as appropriate, clearly identified

with manufacturer's name, approved label, grade or identifying number.
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to Project's Vendors / Manufacturers List.
2.2 PLATES, GENERALLY
A. Blank Plates: Blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes, specified under Division 26
Section "Raceways and Boxes", on which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus
installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be attached
by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical adjustment.
B. Floor outlets and plates are to be watertight and impact resistant.
2.3 PLATES AND CORD-OUTLETS

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Design: Square, rectangular or round designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit electrical
device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws. Combination plates
are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.
B. Cord extension plates are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and finish as
plates.
C. For front of house face plates' materials, finishes and colors, refer to Architecture Finishes
(AF) Report for each area of application:
D. Apartments, Public Spaces and Amenities Face Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure
molded plastic, pearl aluminum color.
1. Man:
2. Ref:
Or other approved equal from Project's Approved Vendors / Manufacturers List.
E. Back of House Face Plates: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white
color, for general use in offices, electrical, mechanical, waste, stores, all other general services
areas and similar.
1. Man:
2. Plat Ref:
F. Where multiple lighting switches are installed next to each other within apartments,
Contractor shall ensure that these lighting switches to be mounted consolidated under common
plate as much as applicable, providing all necessary installation measures.
G. Cable/cord outlet (flex outlet) is to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection of
power/control cable of fixed appliances, as shown on the drawings. Plate is to have threaded
cord grip to anchor cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable
clamp for termination of cable/cord within.
H. Electrical outlet is to consist of outlet box, coverplate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to cable of fixed appliances.
I. Lighting outlet is to consist of outlet box, coverplate, and necessary accessories ready for
connection to lighting fixture.
J. Ceiling rose: similar to lighting outlet equipped with a decorative element affixed to the
ceiling from which a chandelier or lighting fitting is suspended. Ceiling rose to comply with
BS 67.
2.4 SWITCHES
A. General:
1. Quick-make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded base,
with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive loads up to
full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
2. Types: Single, two-way, single pole or double pole, as shown on the Drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Apartments, Public Spaces and Amenities:
1. Lighting Switch : 10A, 250 V a.c., single pole, rocker operated, grid-switch, with
Magnesium color. Painted polycarbonate front cover with Pearl Aluminum color:
One gang - one way Switch:
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
One gang - two way Switch:
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
Two gang - one way Switch:
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
Two gang - two way Switch:
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
Or other approved equal from Project's Approved Vendors / Manufacturers List
2. Lighting Switch ( ): 20A, 250 V a.c., single pole, rocker operated, grid-switch. Painted
polycarbonate front cover with Pearl Aluminum color:
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
3. Double Pole Switch ( ) for fan coil units and exhaust fans: 20A, 250 V a.c., tumbler
operated, to IEC 60669-1, with white molded plastic plate, marked (etched) with
equipment controlled (i.e. fan coil unit, exhaust fan) and with red neon pilot light for
"on" position. Switch is to be mounted to flush or surface box, as required or as shown
on the Drawings, and provided with cord outlet and cord extension to equipment
controlled.
a. Man:
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plat Ref:
4. Double Pole Switch ( ) for water heaters: 20A, 250 V a.c., tumbler operated, to IEC
60669-1, magnesium colored, with pearl aluminum color molded plastic plate, with
"WATER HEATER" marking and with red neon pilot light for "on" position. Switch
is to be mounted to flush, as required or as shown on the Drawings, and provided with
cord outlet and cord extension to water heater.
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plat Ref:
5. Double Pole Switch ( ) for fan coil units and exhaust fans: similar to ( ) for fan coil
units and exhaust fans, but weather proof.
6. Double Pole Switch ( ) for water heaters: similar to ( ) for water heaters, but weather
proof.
C. Back of House:
1. Lighting Switch ( ): 10A, 250 V a.c., single pole, rocker operated, grid-switch with
white polycarbonate plate for use in telecommunications rooms, electrical rooms and
storage rooms.
One gang - one way Switch
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plat Ref:
One gang - two way Switch
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plat Ref:
2. Weatherproof Switch ( ): 10 A, 250 V, single pole, for installation in parking spaces,

and wet areas with weatherproof plate, synthetic gasket, flush mounted outlet box,
on/off indication, IP 55 enclosure.
One gang – one way

a. Man:
b. Ref:
One gang – Two way

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
a. Man:
b. Ref:
3. Double Pole Switch ( ): 20A, 250 V a.c., tumbler operated, to IEC 60669-1, with white
molded plastic plate, marked (etched) with equipment controlled (i.e. fan coil unit,
water heater, exhaust fan) and with red neon pilot light for "on" position. Switch is to
be mounted to flush or surface box, as required or as shown on the Drawings, and
provided with cord outlet and cord extension to equipment controlled.
a. Man:
b. Switch Ref:
c. Plat Ref:
4. Double Pole Switch ( ): similar to ( ) but weather proof.

5. Weather proof Push Button Switch ( ) for mechanically held contactor: As type ( ) but
with push button control (push to make, push to break).
2.5 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. General:
B. To have injection molded plastic base with self-adjusting, non-expanding contacts to prevent
permanent distortion, arranged for side and/or back connection and with screw terminals
accepting at least three parallel branch-circuit wires.
C. To conform to standard Germany practice.
D. Duplex sockets are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break-off feature
for two-circuit connection where used.
E. Weatherproof socket outlets are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in polycarbonate
enclosures and with cover comprising spring-retained gasket hinged flap. Enclosure is to be
pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet specified.
F. Apartments, Public Spaces and Amenities:
1. Socket Type ( ): Single phase, two wire, for plug with 3 mm round pins at 19 mm
centers and with side earthing in accordance with German standard, rated 16A, 250
Vac, with Magnesium color. Painted polycarbonate front cover with Pearl Aluminum:
a. Man:
b. Socket Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
2. Socket Type ( ): As type( ), but duplex outlet.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3. Weatherproof Socket Outlet – Type ( ) (220 V Service): Similar to R01, but with cover
comprising spring-retained gasketted hinged flap. IP55, to be used in balconies
a. Man:
b. Ref:
c. Plate Ref:
4. Socket Type ( ): As type ( ), but connected to UPS and dedicated green.

5. Socket Type ( ): As type ( ) , but duplex outlet.
G. Back of House:
1. Socket Type ( ): Single phase, two wire, for plug with 3 mm round pins at 19 mm
centers and with side earthing in accordance with German standard, rated 16A, 250
Vac. Thermoplastic with painted polycarbonate front cover with White color, for use
in telecommunications rooms/closets, electrical rooms and small storage rooms.
Location of sockets inside Telecommunication rooms/closets, are to be determined
from layouts and details drawings.
a. Man:
b. Ref:
c. Switch Ref:
2. Socket Type ( ): As type ( ), but duplex outlet

3. Weatherproof Socket Outlet - Type R05 (220 V Service): 16 A, 250 V, 2 pole plus
earth, German Standard, enclosed in polycarbonte enclosures, flush mounted outlet
box and with cover comprising spring-retained gasketted hinged flap. IP55, to be
used in parking spaces, and wet areas.
a. Man:
b. Ref:
4. Socket Type ( ): As type , but connected to UPS and dedicated green.

5. Socket Type ( ): As type , but duplex outlet.
6. Industrial Socket Outlet - Type : 1 phase, 32 A, 2P+ E, 200-250 V, with plastic
enclosure and matching plug; IP44 to IEC60309-1 &2, fed from ups, surface
mounted. Exact locations and mounting heights refer to drawings.
a. Man:
b. Ref:
7. Industrial Socket Outlet - Type : 1 phase, 32 A, 2P+ E, 200-250 V, with plastic

enclosure and matching plug; IP44 to IEC60309-1 &2, surface mounted. Exact
locations and mounting heights refer to drawings.
a. Man:
b. Ref:
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
8. Power Socket Outlet - Type (380 V SERVICE): Single outlet, 3P+N+E, 3 phase,
polarized, earthing type, rated 32 A, 380/415 V, to IEC 60309, with splash proof cast
metal box and hinged spring-return plate, and with matching plug 3P+N+E.
a. Man:
b. Ref:
2.6 PLUGS
A. Type: Compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
molded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and
of shape Providing Easy Hand-Grip For Removal.
B. Fuses for standard German type sockets are to be standard 16 A cartridge fuses fitted in plug.
2.7 SPECIAL DEVICES
A. Lighting Contactors
1. Type: Double pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and triple or four-pole for
three phase circuits, mechanically held, electrically operated, rated 500 V, of current
ratings shown on the Drawings, and complying with the appropriate category of IEC
60947-4-1 Table 1.
2. Contacts: Copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed for
switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: As required to provide specified interlocks and signals as shown
on the Drawings, or required by the Specification, with one N.O. and one N.C. spare
contacts.
4. Enclosure: Unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contactor is to
be provided with IP 31 enclosure for indoor use.
5. Control: Each contactor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have
on/off pilot lights, set of on/off push buttons and selectors switches mounted on cover
complying with IEC 60947-5-1. For locations and number of ways of selectors
switches, refer to the panelboards schedules.
B. Door Bell System:
1. Door Bell Push Button: Momentary contact, low voltage, with illuminated label
holder under glassene, flush box, magnesium colored and thermoplastic plate with
pearl aluminum color.
2. Chime: Electronic, with built-in double-wound transformer, 8V - 12V secondary
protected by fuses; primary voltage to correspond with building power supply voltage
at location. Chime is to be two-tone, double insulated, 80 dB at 1-m distance,
adjustable output. It is to be possible to operate chime by 9 V alkaline battery.
3. Wiring: Minimum 1 mm2, PVC insulated copper conductor, run in separate conduit
from all other services. Multi-core cable to each apartment is to be supplied as
required by system.
4. Manufacturers: Obtain doorbell switch from:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
a. Man:
b. Ref:
C. Wall Station:
1. 24V, 30 mA, to match the voltage and ampere of control circuit, IP 20, painted
polycarbonate front cover with Pearl Aluminum color, three buttons hardwired wall
station with three pre-set scenes, as described on drawings, and with LED indicators
to indicate the status of the selected scene.
2. Hardwires shall be provided to the controlled lighting contractors, as shown on the
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition that
would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate
switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets
allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window
trim, paneling and other engineering features.
B. Mounting heights for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the same
or similar areas. Exact mounting heights are to be determined from interior finishing and
detail drawings. Any condition that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be
referred to the Engineer. Mounting is to be as shown on the ID Drawings or as approved by
Engineer. Unless otherwise shown or instructed for wiring devices within back of house
spaces, mount lighting switches and socket outlets generally at the same mounting heights
shown on the ID Drawings. Mount switches with long dimension vertical and operating
handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.
C. Additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by equipment
manufacturers for control or other wiring.
D. Coordination shall be carried out for proper installation of wiring devices within the reception
desk and the exact dimensions of wiring trunking’s openings shall be according to the final
electrical and telecommunication approved accommodated devices.
E. Recessed Outlet Boxes: Make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, allowing for
thickness of finishing, and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to original
condition before installation of fittings or plates.
F. Appearance: Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall surface.
Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without gaps, and fully
covering the box.
G. Grouped Outlets: Arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
H. Waterproof and Explosion-Proof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and
connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
I. Damaged Fittings: Reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings and
plates against damage after installation and until handed over.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use
machine-printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and
durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Single pole switches are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switches
having neutral shunt or bridge.
B. Exposed Outlet Boxes: Securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent inserts or
lead anchors.
C. Connection Of Appliances:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring to
incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install the connecting wiring
in flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on
appliance.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers' published torque-

tightening values.
cables.
D. All tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical representatives
F. Visual Inspection: Fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
G. Megger tests are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation resistance
of wiring installations.
H. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
I. Equipment is to be insulation tested and observed, under full-load for not less than 3 days
operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.
J. Correct malfunctioning installations at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
K. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
3.5 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for
the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.

2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle
switches used for disconnecting means.
C. Components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular, complying with
one set of approved Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and
special features, as applicable for each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
to, the following:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances

and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.

b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
e. Cable terminal size.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between


Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES

with requirements.
D. Samples: Submit samples of each type of equipment for approval, unless otherwise agreed
in writing by the Engineer.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for
components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to
requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Take-Over Procedures," include the
following and to the satisfaction of Employer’s requirements:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
F. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
A. Comply with related Standards specified hereinafter. All circuit breakers shall be of the
latest version of the manufacturers.
B. Comply with the following Standards:
1. UL98.
2. NEMA KS1.
3. NEMA 250.
C. As an alternative, disconnecting switches in compliance with IEC 60947 are acceptable

subject to the following:
1. Having ample space to accommodate both incoming and outgoing cables.

2. Being equipped with metallic enclosure.
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the conditions
specified in Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.”
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other
construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)
A. Type: Heavy duty, non-fused, air break, single throw, 600-V AC, suitable for motor circuits
or for service entrance disconnecting applications, 2, 3, 4 or 6 poles as shown on the
drawings. Disconnecting switches shall comply with UL 98 and NEMA KS 1 or IEC 60947-
3, with ampere rating as shown on the Drawings ensuring its suitability for equipment
horsepower rating where disconnecting switch is used for switching motors or other highly
inductive loads.
B. Design: Safety type, housed in separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on
each pole.
C. Short Circuit Withstand: Switch disconnectors shall be capable of withstanding the

maximum short circuit current at the point of installation in combination with the upstream
protective device.
D. Operating Handle: A suitable handle made of conducting material shall be provided for
safety and convenient operation of the switch and it shall be in electrical connection with the
enclosure. In case the position of the switch contacts is indicated by the position of the
operating handle, then there shall be definite off and on indicated positions for the handle,
and the design of the operating mechanism shall be such that the handle cannot be left
readily at or near the off position when the switch is on. A handle indicating the position of
the switch contacts either closed or open shall be designed such that the door cannot be
closed and secured in place with the handle indicating off while the switch contacts are in
the on position.
E. Operating Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break, double contact rotary blade mechanism,

independent manual operation. The design of the operating mechanism in conjunction with
the contact structure shall be such that, in normal operation, the persons operating the switch
cannot restrain the operations of the contacts after they have initially touched or parted when
closing or opening the switch. The design and construction of the operating mechanism shall
assure ample strength and rigidity. Screws and nuts serving to attach operating parts to cross
bars or other movable members shall be upset or otherwise locked to prevent loosening

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
under the jarring of continued use. Stops shall be provided as necessary to remove undue
strain from switch parts. Materials shall be suited for the particular application. Contacts and
terminals shall be made of tin plated copper of 99.5% purity.
F. Mechanical Interlock: the box, cover and switch operating mechanism shall be mechanically
interlocked so that the door is normally prevented from being opened when the switch
contacts are in the closed position and the switch contacts are normally prevented from
being closed when the door is open. Switch disconnector shall be provided with a defeatable
interlock by which a qualified person using the necessary tools can open the door while the
switch is in the on position or close the contacts when the door is open. Interlock shall be
reactivated automatically when the enclosure door is closed.
G. Padlocking: Means shall be provided for padlocking enclosures shut, they shall be provided
to positively lock the switch with the contacts in the off position with a padlock and shall
accommodate at least three padlocks. Any single padlock shall be capable of providing
locking.
H. Enclosure: Enclosures shall be made of steel material, properly anti-corrosion treated and
electrostatic coated unless otherwise specified. Enclosures shall comply with NEMA 250
type 1A (IP 23 to IEC 60529) for indoor general use installations, NEMA 250 type 12 (IP
54 to IEC 60529) for indoor industrial / mechanical rooms installations and NEMA 250
type 3R (IP 65 to IEC 60529) for outdoor installations, unless otherwise required or shown
on the Drawings. Enclosures shall be used with the appropriate conductor entry fittings;
such as knockouts and bolt on hub kit in order to maintain the specified environmental
capability after installation. External operating mechanisms mounted on or through the
enclosure shall pass the applicable test for the enclosure as specified in NEMA 250.
I. Spacing in enclosed switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA KS-1.
J. Terminals: A switch shall have suitable wiring terminals for connection of conductors
having an ampacity not less than the switch’s current rating for only current rated switches.
K. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum
ground conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures

before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locations: Drawings generally show approximate locations of equipment. Exact locations

are to be determined from detail drawings. Any condition that would place equipment in an
unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
B. Waterproof Fittings: Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and connection to

conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
C. Damaged Equipment: Reject damaged equipment. Protect equipment against damage after
installation and until handed over.
D. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and
indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values.
cables.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Visual Inspection: Equipment is to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
G. Operation: Devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full load
without any signs of heating.
H. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and
control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
I. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in the
relevant standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
J. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
K. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
switches and circuit breakers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action
taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges to fulfill the coordination study requirements.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR
SECTION 263213 - EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
"General requirements", apply to work of this Section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16050, apply to work of this Section.
C. Distribution transformer section 16270.
D. Primary medium voltage switchgear and ring main units section 16330.
E. Low voltage switchgear assemblies (main distribution boards) section 16430.
F. Testing and commissioning section 16950.
G. Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical Systems and related
contract drawings, apply to this section of the work.
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set complete with radiator, concrete
base, engine generator batteries, charger, silencer, daily tank, complete fuel system and cooling
system, air filters, generator control panel, power command parallel system, digital master control and
all required appurtenances and accessories. Refer to appropriate section of Specifications and
drawings for additional requirements.
B. The contractor should check the existing building and all civil works, opening, louvers required,
ancillary works and material required for complete installation and should be included in his offer.
C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of diesel engine generator sets of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 10 years. Provide diesel engine generator set produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
D.
E. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC 60034, IEC 60085,
ISO 3046, ISO 8528, DIN, VDE, IES, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards pertaining to
diesel generator set.
F.
G. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will
govern.
H.
I. In case of conflict among the specifications, drawings and BOQ, the more stringent provision will
govern.
J.
K. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and Use of
Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines;" NFPA 99, "Standard for Health Care Facilities;"
NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures;" "Life Safety Code;" "NFPA
110 level 01;" and "Emergency Standby Power Systems".

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the job site, at which
spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a full-time employee of the
manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained and qualified individual whose primary duty
is field service.
B. Equipment Rating: 230/400 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50HZ, 1500 rpm, Kw rating as indicated on the
drawings. At temperature 50C, altitude 300 meter and humidity 90%. at 0.8 power factor and capable
of continuous operation at rated output for the duration of any utility power failure up to 24 hours.
Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation of the set at rated generator RPM when equipped
with all necessary operating accessories, such as radiator, air cleaners, radiator fan, lubricating oil
pump, fuel transfer pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor alternating current
generator and exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
C. The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine, generator, radiators
and all major items of auxiliary equipment).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets and components,
including:
1. Drawing of the diesel generator set.
2. The following data in tabulated form:
a. Make of engine.
b. Number of cylinders.
c. Bore, inches (millimeters).
d. Stroke, inches (millimeters).
e. Piston displacement, cubic inches (liters).
f. Piston speed, feet per minute (liters/min.), at rated RPM.
g. BMEP at rated KW output.
h. Make and type of generator.
i. Generator electrical rating, KVA or KW at .8 power factor.
j. Number and type of bearings.
k. Exciter type.
l. Generator insulation class and temperature rise.
m. Parts and service support.
n. Engine manufacturer's certified engine BHP curve and certified generator set fuel
consumption curve.
3. Batteries and battery charger.
4. Silencer.
5. Day tank.
6. Fuel system, including fuel pipes from generators set to main fuel tank, construction and fuel tank
details.
7. Cooling system complete (radiator).
8. Exhaust system complete.
9. All auxiliaries.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of diesel engine
generator sets in addition to operation instructions, wiring diagrams, schematics & interconnection
wiring diagrams and location of cable connection point.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all accessories
furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load test including the following:
1. Cold start acceleration to rated voltage and frequency within 8 seconds.
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per hour). Frequency
and voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits specified herein.
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load, and 2 hours full
load; plus 1 hours overload at 110%. Test shall be conducted at .8 power factor.
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their respective audio and
visual alarms.
D. A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment shall be provided,
together with suitable means of identification, storage and securing.
F. Supply with each engine-generator set, a soldered galvanized steel drip pan to be placed beneath the
engine to catch any leakage from the set.
G. Sound pressure levels for the engine-generator sets must be submitted to the Consultant for review
and accepted by him prior to the units being shipped to the site.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Obtain all necessary permits prior to delivery.
B. Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C. Upon delivery, inspects for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit with this
specification.
D. Prior to installation, engine-generator controls and all associated electrical equipment shall be stored
indoors, fully protected from weather, dust and dirt.
E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and handling shall be in
full accordance with engine-generator manufacturers' requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment
contained therein.
F. Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new equipment.
G. Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and braced for any
overland and vertical travel.
1.6 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and workmanship
under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than 1 year
from date of initial start-up and Employer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel time for
necessary repairs at the job site. The system warranty not to be limited by running hours.
1.7 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
A. The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a period of five years
after guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the following:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Engine manufacturer's recommended procedures for weekly (biweekly) inspection and

maintenance to be done by user.
2. Quarterly inspection by the supplier personnel to review the weekly maintenance records being
kept by user and train any new Employer operating personnel. Inspection to include scheduled oil
sampling for lube oil contaminants as outlined below. Also include a 100% load test run on the
generator set.
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the generator set under
system load.
4. Emergency call-back service, available 24 hour per day, 7 days per week.
B. Scheduled Oil Sampling
1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment must provide an
oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for Schedule Oil Sampling.
2. Scheduled Oil Sampling of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method and accurate to within
a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:
a. Iron
b. Chromium
c. Copper
d. Aluminum
e. Silicon
f. Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of acceptance and include the
following:
a. Sample extraction gun (1).
b. Bottle (10).
c. Postage-paid mailers (10).
d. Written instructions (1).
5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical reading. If
readings are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is operating within established
parameters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the automatic start diesel generating sets with all
necessary switchgear, control panel, radiators and accessories all as either herein specified or shown on
the Drawings.
The size of the set shall be prime rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when operating at the
specified frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and humidity.
The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details shown on the drawings, but a
final detailed and dimensioned layout suitable for construction shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, prior to ordering of equipment.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare parts may be
obtained.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be such as to minimize
noise and vibration.
Materials and workmanship - All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified herein, shall
be new and unused, of current manufacture and highest grade.
Manufacturer - The unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the engine
manufacturer. It shall be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized dealer having a parts and
service facility in the area.
Warranty - Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective parts or
workmanship under dealer's standard warranty. Warranty period shall in no case be less than one year of
unrestricted service commencing from date of putting the unit into service and not limited to any fours
limitation.
Tests - The generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing. Prior to
acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any defects and be subjected
to full load test.
Start-up and Instructions - On completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a factory-trained
dealer service representative. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall be supplied upon delivery
of the unit and procedures explained to operating personnel.
Specifications and Drawings - The bidders shall furnish information showing manufacturer's model
numbers, dimensions and weights for the generator set and major auxiliary equipment. Proposed
deviations from the specifications shall be stated in the bid. The successful bidder shall submit copies of
pertinent drawings. and wiring diagrams for approval.
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528; except for the data
center which should have performance class G3 capable of carrying data center continuous loads
according to ISO 8528 and should be UP-time certified.
2.2 OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The loss of normal power from the utility shall automatically cause the generating set to start.
The Diesel generating set shall have an automatic start facility.
The emergency generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full speed from cold
condition within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse. It shall then be capable of accepting 100% of its power
rating load under power factor variations of 0.8 to unity lagging with maximum transient voltage over or
under 5-7 % and maximum transient frequency variation of ± 5% with steady frequency + 1/2% of nominal
(within 5 sec's).
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall come to rest for 10
seconds. Two further attempts shall be automatically performed with intermediate periods of rest. Should
the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall sound and signal "start failure" shall illuminate.
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation purposes. For this purpose
the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch arranged for OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO. It shall be
possible to run the engine with or without operation of the Emergency circuit breakers.
The Diesel generator set must still be running a 3-5 minutes after transfer and after removal of all load to
ensure that a change-over in the event of a repeated mains failure can rapidly be realized and to obtain a
cooling effect to avoid an accumulation of heat.
2.3 EQUIPMENT

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. GENERAL
The engine-generator sets shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base suitable for
skidding as indicated in the drawings.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to wear.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the drive and absorb the
transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded by a coupling ring and adequate steel
guards.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all instrumentation and
control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This may be achieved either by mounting
the combined engine/generator unit to a separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on the main frame, or
by mounting the entire main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing the machine instrument
panel by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by its own resilient mounting. The
mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure and thickness shall be approved by the
manufacturer and the Engineer.
2.4 DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual turbo-charged and
after cooled and not series turbocharged. It shall operate on diesel fuel oil at 1500 R.P.M. including the
capacity to withstand 10% overload for one hour in any period of twelve hours. The net power rating of the
engine under worst site conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric power indicated on the
generator taking into consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled driven shaft mounted radiator, Coolant temperature shall be
measured and controlled by means of one or more thermostats.
Or, the engine shall be of the water-cooled, remote radiator type (applicable where indicated on the
drawings and B.O.Q) with gear driven water pump system shall be pressurized and equipped with a
heavy-duty remote radiator complete with break tank and water pumps, shut off values. The remote radiator
shall be mounted on ground floor level supplied with totally enclosed unit for outdoor and cooled by a refers
flow fan. A fan coil and hand protection guard shall be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be measured and
controlled by means of one or more thermostats.
The remote radiator electric fan motor and water circulating pumps must be powered by the diesel
generator set. This load requirement must be added to the total set power.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full flow lubricating oil
filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger. Filter system shall be equipped with
a spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance against stoppage of lubricating oil circulation in the event the
filters become clogged.
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of camshafts and
connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by gravity from a day fuel
tank. It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter elements. The fuel system shall be equipped
with a built in, gear type, engine driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel against a head of 250 cms.
for supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with flanges, flexible
exhaust expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential exhaust silencer which shall be fitted with
a drain plug at its lower end to permit evacuation of condensed humidity. The exhaust piping shall be
insulated with calcium cilecate tape with a total thickness not below 50 mm. The size of exhaust pipe

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
should be calculated and determined according to the back pressure limitations as specified by the
manufacturer.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible either manually by means of push button or
automatically by means of the automatic control panel. The starting system shall consist of a 24 volts d.c.
Starter motor, heavy duty 24 volts long life lead - acid battery and a suitable automatic trickle battery
charger.
Batteries shall be enclosed in enameled steel, corrosion resistant. ventilated, totally enclosed enclosure
complete with drip shield. Enclosure shall also be complete with hydrometer, syringe, jumper cables and
mounting bracket for accessories. Enclosure shall be free standing, floor mounted.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop adjustments shall be
provided and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signaling lights shall be provided to shut down the engine in
the event of engine overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, over cranking and high cooling water
temperature.
Complete shutdown system shall be arranged to energize an alarm system located within the plant room
and to trip the respective generator circuit-breaker.
The following engine mounted instruments shall be provided:
1. Water temperature gauge calibrated inC

2. Lubricating oil temperature gauge calibrated inC
3. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
4. Tachometer.
5. Operating time meter.
6. Oil filter differential.
7. Jacket water temperature.
8. Fuel pressure.
2.5 GENERATOR
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen protected, revolving
field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct connection to the engine at the flywheel
end.
Required Generator Characteristics
a. Type Brushless with salient pole field system incorporating rotating exciter and
three phase rectifier system.
b. No. of phases Three with 4 terminals
c. Voltage 400 Y/230
d. Winding connection Star with grounded neutral
e. Net rated output As indicated on the drawings @ 50 C ambient temperature.
f. Power factor 0.8 lagging.
g. Frequency 50Hz.
h. Enclosure IP IP-23
i. Maintained short circuit 300% of rated current for 3 seconds.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
j. Voltage regulator Automatic, readily accessible controls for voltage level.
k. Overload 10% of name plate rating for one hour every 12 hours.
l. Insulation Class "H" stator, class "H" rotor with temperature rise according to class F 105 C over
40C ambient temperature.
The exciter shall be of the solid state type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral part of the
alternator.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and load power factor
between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is connected to its load
circuit.
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530 (less than 5%
deviation. The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or equivalent.
Engine-Generator Set Control: The control shall have automatic remote start capability. A panel mounted
switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the engine in the RUN position and allow
the engine to start and run by closing remote contact, and stop by opening the remote contact when in the
REMOTE position.
a. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle, nonadjustable, shall consist of
an automatic crank period of approximately 15 seconds duration followed by a rest period of
approximately 15 seconds duration as per NFPA 110. Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and
running. Two means of cranking termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other. Failure to
start after three cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually indicate an over
crank shutdown on the panel.
b. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon: failing to start after the specified time (over
crank), overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, high engine temperature, or operation of a remote
manual stop station.
c. The generator control panel shall have degree of protection IP 44.
d. The control shall provide a light engine monitor on the control panel; one red light for each of the four
shut downs (except the remote manual stop), and one yellow light each for the high engine
temperature and low engine oil pressure pre-alarms, and one green run light. The control panel
monitor shall include; a flashing red light to indicate the generator set is not in automatic start mode, a
yellow light to indicate low coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate low fuel, and two red lights
for auxiliary use.
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The engine-generator set
starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut down circuits shall be independent of
indication and pre-alarm circuits. Individual relay signals shall be provided for each indication for
external circuit connections (not to exceed 1/2 amp draw) to a remote annunciator. A common alarm
contact for external connection to an audible alarm shall be provided.
e. Provide condensation heater.
f. Provide battery charger, on/off pilot lights.
g. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine temperature fault.
h. Provide the supervised points as indicated in fire alarm system section 16722.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
i. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall mounted type
as indicated on the drawings. The control shall include surge suppression for protection of solid
state components. A front control panel illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided.
Control panel mounted indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge,
Generator Running, Automatic Mode, Cool Down Mode, Fail to Synchronize (where applicable), Not
in Auto Mode, Generator Overload, Reverse Power, Coolant Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and
Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage adjusting rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage
+/- 5% from rated value; Analog AC Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2%
accuracy; Analog AC Ammeter, dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency meter,
45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/- 0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector switch with OFF
position to allow meter display of current and voltage in each generator phase.
j. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30 minutes.
2.6 FUEL SYSTEM
The diesel generator shall be provided with a fuel system (daily tank & main tank) as indicated in
mechanical specification section (15660 & 15661).
2.7 BATTERY TRICKLE CHARGER
A battery trickle charger mounted on the wall and shall be supplied with the generator in order to maintain
the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted with on-off switch indicator light, input and output
fuses and reverse current protection. Upon operation of the standby plant the charger shall be
disconnected from the battery and from the mains. An ammeter to indicate rate of charger and battery
voltmeter shall be fitted for each set of batteries.
2.8 ENGINE GENERATOR SUPPORT AND ISOLATION SYSTEM
A. Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting the
engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with housings that include
vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed; the isolators complete
with neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and supports.
C. All mounting levelling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less than 0.8 of the
compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a minimum additional travel to solid
equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
D. Provide spring mounted “all-directional seismic springs and snubber” as per the manufacturer
recommendations.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the generating set.
Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
A water pipes shall be installed between the radiator and the engine.
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories and items for a
complete emergency generating set.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine maintenance and normal
over hauls, in suitable cupboard.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied with the set, and
placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list, complete with all relevant part number, shall be
supplied with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall be supplied in
English in 3 copies.
2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Refer To Section “16999”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION And TESTING
A. Examine conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator sets and parallel panel are to be
installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. The tests to be carried out in accordance to IET 17th. Edition, BS 7671, all other relevant international
standards.
C. Upon installation at site all generators should be subjected to testing as performed in the factory to
ensure that no damages has occurred in transit and the panels are safe to be energized (SAT).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diesel engine-driven generator set and parallel panel as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work with other work.
C. Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E. Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by engine - generator unit
manufacturer.
F. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine-driven generator units as required.
G. Install diesel fuel piping from diesel engine to daily tank.
H. Install concrete bases of dimension indicated on drawings or as otherwise required for packaged engine
generators according to the manufacturer recommendations.
I. Slope of Engine exhaust piping should be specified to avoid any condensate return back to engine.
A. Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect system to ensure
compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer or technician
employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to technically supervise and participate
during all of the adjustments and tests for the set and major auxiliaries.
Make adjustments and test in the presence of the Employer.
C. Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
1. A minimum of 3800 liters of fuel oil for testing.
2. Record room temperature and time of beginning of test.
3. Start the units and record the number of seconds it takes each unit to get it started.
4. Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM and frequency
meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against frequency meter reading.
1. Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on generator for minimum of 4
hours.
D. Mechanical Examination
1. Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the load test. If any
fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or replace the leaking item as required,
and restart the load test. It is necessary that each unit run for 2 hours at full load without any leaks
or excessive water temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.
2. Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the speed at which the
engine automatically shuts down.
3. Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test for automatic
engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4. Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature relay to test for
automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5. With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure room and
outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the motor - generator
manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air temperatures at 50oC design day.
2. The Contractor to submit this data to the motor - generator manufacturer for computation of
equivalent room temperature based upon 50oC day operation. Manufacturer to certify that room
temperature data is consistent with manufacturer's recommended operating limits for a 50oC design
day.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.4 INSTRUCTION AND FINAL INSPECTIONS
A. Laminate or mount under plexiglass a set of operating instructions for the system and install instructions
within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel engine-generator set.
B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for five 4-hour periods for
instructing personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the dates requested by the
Employer.
C. Contractor to furnish 5 copies of operating, maintenance and diagnostic instructions and parts list, and
illustrated parts books covering the engine-generator and auxiliary equipment which will require
operating instructions and periodic maintenance.
D. Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and fuses with each set.
3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING
E. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Employer's building personnel in procedures for starting
up, testing and operating stand-by generators and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three operator's manual
providing installation and operating instructions for each generator.
3.6 DIESEL GENERATOR: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL TESTING/COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works, the following
testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
1.0 At the manufacturers works
All testing to the satisfaction of the Employer's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run:
‐ 50% for ½ hour + 75% for ½ hour..
‐ 2 hours full load + 1 hour 10% overload.
a. Recorded ½ hourly readings of speed, oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature, fuel
consumption, battery charge rate and voltage, generator voltage, load current, kilowatt
output, frequency and power factor, generator temperature rise when connected to a
resistive/reactive load to produce 0.8 power factor.
b. Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 385V from full load to no load to full load,
including transient variation and response time.
c. Demonstration of speed/frequency regulation under conditions of 2 above.
d. Cold start, 3 attempts and lockout on set fail.
e. Cold start, run up and on full load time.
f. Demonstration of accuracy of all metering using standard test meters.
g. Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
h. Demonstration of full sequential operation.
i. Demonstration of all alarm and indication.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
j. Temperature rises on generator starter/rotor.
k. Installation resistance of generator bed plate wiring and controls.
Battery Tests:
‐ Measure charging voltage & voltages between available battery terminals for full charging and
float charging conditions.
‐ Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
‐ Check electrolyte level & specific gravity under both conditions.
‐ Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.
‐ Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge.
‐ Verify measurements are within manufacturer’s specification.
Battery Charger Test:
‐ Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floating conditions.
Records of all tests shall be made in appropriate test folders and initialled by the Contractor and
Employer's Consultant. These shall be photocopied and 3 No sets provided under the contract.
The Contractor shall provide 14 days notice of tests to the Employer's consultant and shall allow
witnessing of tests by the Employer's consultant.
2.0 On Site After Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil and test loads
for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Employer's consultant.
The Contractor shall carry out the following:
a. Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts are in proper
alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly installed and located.
b. Check water and sum oil levels.
c. Check the battery and terminal connections.
d. Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
e. Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel oil.
f. Check that all radiator and engine block water drain points are free from sludge and other
blockages.
g. Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings, governor
settings, pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe work, etc.
h. Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel. All lugs for principal connections
shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable abrasive material shall be used where
necessary.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
i. Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the functioning of any
interlocks fitted.
j. Check all signal and control circuits for correct operation.
k. Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is not less than
the Specialist Supplier's figures.
l. Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal speed. Check
that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the mains battery charger is
automatically switched off
m. Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that the generator
voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due allowance for no-load
conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with that of the engine tachometer.
n. Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
o. Restart set and run at various loads for periods totalling at least 3 hours. Check the voltage and
current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are being maintained with the
required limits with large alterations of load. Note the rate of charge on the alternator ammeter
with the engine stopped. Check against specialist rates in necessary.
p. Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at various loads.
q. Check that all the engine safeguards operate satisfactorily.
r. Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the performance of all
flexible connections, both mechanical and electrical are satisfactory.
s. Check the effectiveness of the radio suppression.

t. Check the temperature rise in the alternator.
u. Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their associated
switching control gear.
v. Check the slop of engine exhaust piping to avoid any condensate return back to the engine.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Employer's consultant, the lubricating oil be finally
checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been commissioned,
they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
i) 50% load for ½ hour.

ii) 75% load for ½ hour.
iii) 100% load for 2 hours.
iv) 110% load for 1 hour.
Sound level readings in the following areas to establish compliance with 75 dB at:
a) 1m from generator set room.

b) 1m from exhaust outlet pipe.
The contractor is fully responsible to determine exactly what type of silencers, air - inlet louvers and air
- outlet louvers, and acoustical treatment for the generator room will be used to reach the above
mentioned sound level readings.
3.7 INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signalling and metering information for the central control system and
to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 230 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add interposing
relays.
All analogue measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier (either 4-
20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
Generator should be started via ATS system interface is required with the power monitoring system.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER GENERAL
SECTION 263323 - CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes AC / AC central inverter battery system for emergency lighting that
automatically sense loss of normal ac supply and to transfer loads from normal to battery -
inverter supply on supply power failure, and that automatically retransfer to normal supply
when normal power is restored, without addressability or remote monitoring facility as
specified hereinafter in this section

2. Division 26 Section “Interior Lighting”.
3. Division 26 Section “Panelboards”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BMS: Building management system.
B. CBS: Central battery system.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. VRLA: Valve-regulated lead acid.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control and
indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating modes and
any load limitations that may apply.
B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.

D. Shop and Construction Drawings: For central battery inverter equipment unit include plans,
elevations, sections, and mounting details. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, ventilation requirements, method of field

assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include block diagram
for BMS interface points. Include system one-line diagram, internal and interconnecting
wiring; and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include elevation, details, and
legends of control and indication displays. Include circuit current (withstand) rating of unit.
E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around central battery equipment. Show
central battery equipment layout and relationships between electrical components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and
weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article..
G. Product Certificates: For central battery equipment.
H. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
I. Guarantee certification for 10 years battery operation as a minimum.
J. Source quality-control reports.
K. Battery sizing calculation based on 100% lighting output ratio.
L. Records and Reporting: on completion of the work, drawings of the emergency escape
lighting installation shall be provided and retained on the premises. The drawings shall be
made in accordance with EN 50171 requirements. In particular, they shall identify all
luminaires and the main components, and shall be regularly updated with any subsequent
changes to the system. These drawings shall be signed by a competent person to verify that
the design meets the requirements of this standard.
M. Log Book: a log book shall be provided for the recording of routine examinations, tests,
defects and alteration. These shall be available as a hard copy automatically printed from an
automatic testing device.
N. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
three years from the date of completion of the project.
O. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
spare parts of the system shall be made available upon request at least 10 years from the date
of the Substantial Completion.
P. Operation and Maintenance Data: For central battery equipment to include in emergency
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01:
a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

control modules.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for selecting and setting field-adjustable
controls and status and alarm points.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Manufacture’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing of

central battery system as specified in this document. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001
certified and shall design to internationally accepted standard.
B. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test
procedure to test all functions of the central battery inverters and batteries (via a discharge
test), when supplied by the central battery inverters manufacturer and guarantee compliance
with the specification. The manufacturer shall submit a copy of the test report. Tests shall
comply with EN 50171 for the central battery system and with IEC 62034 for the automatic
test system.
C. Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the central battery inverters
shall be new, of current manufacture, and have not been in prior service, except as required
during factory testing. All active electronic devices shall be solid state and not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommended specified tolerances for temperature or current to ensure
maximum reliability. All semiconductor devices shall be sealed. The manufacturer shall
conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final products. Materials and
components shall be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards used shall be approved prior
to manufacture.
D. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of central

battery inverters manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of system required for
this Project.
E. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice and
maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to support
day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer may
disqualify a manufacturer.
F. Standards: the emergency lighting system shall comply with the following standards:
1. EN 50171 “Central power supply systems”.

2. EN 50172 “Emergency Escape Lighting Systems”.
3. EN 50272-2 “Safety Requirements for Secondary Batteries and Battery Installations –
Part 2: Stationary Batteries”.
4. IEC 62034 “Automatic test systems for battery powered emergency escape lighting”.
5. IEC 60896 “Stationary Lead Acid Batteries”.
6. IEEE 485 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary
Applications”.
7. IEC 61347-1 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 1: General and Safety Requirements”.
8. IEC 61347-2-11 “Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-11: Particular Requirements For
Miscellaneous Electronic Circuits Used with Luminaires”.
9. IEC 61000-6-2 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards -
Immunity for industrial environments”.
Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments”.
11. NFPA 101 “Life Safety Code”
12. BS EN 1838 “Lighting Applications – Emergency Lighting”
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Prior to shipping all products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.
C. Store equipment in spaces having environments controlled within manufacturers' written

instructions for ambient temperature and humidity conditions for non-operating equipment.
D. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding 3 months without
powering up the equipment for a period of 8 hours to recharge the batteries. Relevant
Certificate for the batteries production date shall be submitted to the Engineer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace central battery system and replace
batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year warranty from the date of substantial completion for central
battery system and batteries.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra products to the Employer.
1. Fuses: 5% of each type and rating.

2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters where applicable: One complete set.
B. The above mentioned list indicates the minimum spare parts required and shall be confirmed
by the manufacturer at the material submittal stage and submitted for Engineer’s approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
A. Equipment Description: Factory-fabricated standard product from a single manufacturer.
B. Load Description: Supply power without noise, vibration, pulsation of load, or abnormal
output or visual appearance for the following loads types, in any combination and at any
percentage of unit capacity:
1. LED lights with electronic drives

2. Fluorescent lights with electronic ballasts.
C. Emergency lighting system shall provide an average of 10.8 lux illumination level with a
maximum to minimum illumination uniformity of 40:1, throughout the facility unless
otherwise required by the local codes, whichever is more stringent.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Emergency lighting system shall operate for minimum 1.5 hour(s) duration while achieving
the illuminance level stated in paragraph above at the end of the battery discharge period.
E. The Central Inverter system shall illuminate the escape route on failure of the mains supply.
However if the mains failure is limited to a part or zone or sub-circuit, emergency and exit
signage of that area alone shall be illuminated without any change in other areas, where the
mains is healthy
F. Integral maintenance bypass facility with ability to support output load in bypass mode whilst
maintenance is performed
G. The battery and system design shall be capable of meeting the declared performance initially,
during and at the end of the stated life.
H. In general, emergency lighting shall be provided by using lamps from the luminaires used for
the main normal illumination, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
I. BMS Interface: CBS shall interface to the Management Level Network through a BACnet/IP
third party gateway. The gateway shall be provided by the CBS supplier and shall interface
with the Management Level Network in coordination with the BMS contractor. The BMS
contractor shall obtain a list of the BACnet object IDs/names from the CBS supplier.
J. In coordination with BMS contractor a Windows based software shall be provided to provide
detailed information for the system. The standard features shall include (but not limited to):
1. Main supply power failure.

2. System normal.
3. Load on inverter.
4. Inverter shut down.
5. System in alarm condition.
6. Inverter output overload.
7. Earth fault alarm.
8. Over temperature alarm.
9. Battery discharge.
10. Remaining battery backup time.
11. High/low battery voltage alarm.
12. Battery charger failure.
13. Total output power.
K. Instrumentation and Controls: Include the following minimum array:
1. Ready normal-power on light.

2. Charge light.
3. Inverter supply load light.
4. Battery voltmeter.
5. AC output voltmeter.
6. Load ammeter.
7. Test switch to simulate ac failure.
8. Meter accuracy within 2 percent or scale range.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Under normal conditions the load shall be fed from the normal AC power supply through the
change-over switch and the battery is re-charged up to full charge state via the battery charger.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
The battery is maintained in an idle condition ready to feed the load, with continuous
monitoring of its output for healthy conditions with an alarm to be initiated in case of
malfunction.
B. Upon loss of normal power supply, the load shall be automatically transferred to DC battery
/ inverter supply through the change-over switch and power shall be supplied from the
batteries until the normal supply returns, upon normal power supply restoration then the load
is retransferred to the normal supply.
C. Transfer Time: Less than 1.0 second.
D. If the normal power supply failure period exceeds the rated duration of the battery, the load
shall be automatically shut down to protect the battery from deep discharge. The system shall
automatically reset itself upon normal power supply return.
E. The system shall be capable of supplying the lighting fixtures to achieve a 100% lighting
output ration upon loss on normal power supply.
2.4 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
A. The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP 21 with removable screwed
front, rear and top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The electronics section
shall have IP 21 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window for all central
systems and IP 21 sheet steel enclosure with full metal door for all substations. Doors and
removable panels shall be so fastened that access to dangerous live parts is not possible
without the use of a tool or key. Wireways shall be smooth and free from sharp edges, burrs,
flashes, etc. which might cause damage to the insulation of the wiring parts. Metal screws
shall not protrude into wireways.
B. The enclosures shall be resistant to heat and fire and tested in accordance with EN 50171
requirements.
C. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries from
top via multiple undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables and looping
circuits shall be connected on protected and fused terminals. All outgoing luminaire circuits
shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in type terminals not less than 3
sq.m.
2.5 CHANGEOVER RELAYS
A. The Central Battery System (CBS) design shall incorporate sub-circuit monitoring on the
related normal lighting circuits. When a normal lighting circuit fails the dedicated emergency
fittings shall be powered from the CBS supply. System shall have built-in facility to ensure
that the batteries are only used on a full mains failure.
B. Changeover relays shall be provided for the switched maintained emergency lighting system
to energize the emergency lighting by operation of the local switched supply during the
existence of normal power supply and automatically illuminate in the event of local sub-
circuit supply failure (irrespective of the position of the local switch).
C. Changeover relay shall be 220V ac, compact and easy to install.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.6 CHARGER
A. Charger module shall be micro -processor controlled module with temperature controlled
voltage charging to IU characteristics. Automatic boost charging facility shall be built in to
the system depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging and
supervising method for failure indication of battery circuits as well as battery charger. Battery
chargers shall be capable of automatically charging their batteries that have been discharged
so that they can perform at least 80 % of their specified duration within 12 h of
commencement of charge in accordance with EN 50171. The charger shall have built in deep
discharge protection and shall be provided with LED indications for:
1. Operation.
2. Charger on.
3. Booster on.
4. Mains operation.
5. Battery capacity >10 percent, >50 percent, 100 percent.
6. Charging failure.
7. Insulation fault.
B. Charger shall have potential free indicator contacts for:
1. Charging failure.
2. Fast charge.
3. Insulation fault.
C. The battery charger shall be so designed that a short circuit on its output will not cause
damage.
D. Charger shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures. Charger shall include
plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and battery accessible via the
front plate of the charger.
2.7 BATTERIES
A. Batteries shall be maintenance free, VRLA sealed leak proof and in compliance with IEC
60896. Batteries shall have extremely low gas generation, low self -discharge and have
permanently sealed pressure release vents.
B. Battery ampere-hour rating shall be sufficient for emergency period specified with all
luminaires operating at full luminous output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.75 V per
cell. Cells shall be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life shall not be less
than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected service.
At the end of the specified duration for the system, the output voltage shall be not less than
90% of the nominal voltage at the nominal load.
C. Batteries shall be installed and provision for maintenance made in accordance with EN 50272-
2 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Date of manufacture shall be stamped on each battery and shall be less than 3 months from
the date of delivery to the site.
E. Battery calculations according to IEEE 485 shall be carried out by the CBS supplier and
submitted for approval, based on the following:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Nominal active power factor of not less than 0.9 Lag

2. Temperature factor for operation at 25 Deg C.
3. Aging factor of 1.25.
4. Design margin factor of 1.1.
5. Recharge time not exceeding 12 hours so that the battery can perform at least 80 % of
their specified duration.
2.8 INVERTERS
A. Inverter: Solid-state type, with the following features:
1. Output Voltage: Automatically regulated to within plus or minus 5 percent.

2. Output Frequency: Automatically regulated to within plus or minus 1 Hz, from no load
to full load at unit power factor over the operating range of the battery voltage.
3. Total Conversion Efficiency: 75 percent, minimum.
4. Output Waveform of Unit: Sine-wave with maximum 5-percent total harmonic
distortion throughout the battery operating-voltage range, from no load to full load
2.9 WIRING
A. Internal wiring used to carry AC supply and safety equipment circuits shall be separated from
each other by running through separate compartments or by double insulation.
B. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables”.
2.10 FINISH
A. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish over corrosion-resistant prime

treatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store central battery inverter equipment according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive central battery equipment, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, structural support,
ventilation, temperature, humidity and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been
permanently established in spaces where equipment will be installed, before
installation begins.
C. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
D. Examine routing layout for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections
before installation.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 900 mm in
front of unit.
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars
and distribution spools.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical

Materials and Methods" and shall comply with EN 50171.
B. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on central
battery system unit after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and
standards.
cables.
G. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supervision of unit installation, connections, and adjustments

by a factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.
H. Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test unit
functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies with
Specifications. Perform tests on completion of unit installation and after building circuits
have been energized. Provide instruments to permit accurate observation of tests. Include
the following tests:
1. Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.

2. Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers due to normal source failure
and restoration.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3. Verify emergency-supply duration.

4. Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this Project
without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation of the load
or its output.
I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
J. Data logging shall include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and spike
bursts, drop-outs, high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape for
subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.
K. Tests shall include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and harmonic content
and frequency stability.
L. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.
M. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections,
including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection
criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match original finish.
Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to

manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into
service.
B. Replace central battery equipment whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids
prior to Substantial Completion.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Testing and commissioning of the emergency central battery system shall be conducted
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the CBS system.
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
Maintenance Data."
advance notice.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
SECTION 263533 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
CAPACITORS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and less.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; shipping, installed,
and operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or elements; and data on features, ratings,
and performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, method of
field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show access and
workspace requirements and required clearances.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail internal and interconnecting wiring and differentiate between
C. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of product's compliance with specified requirements.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 01. Include the following:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for storage at Project
site.
2. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal conditions.
F. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
prices for three years of operation including warranty period. This price shall be valid for three
years from the date of completion of the project.
G. Guarantee to supply spares for the electrical equipment for a minimum period of ten years
from the date the equipment is made operational.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.4 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. Comply with:
1. IEC 60831-1&-2, IEC 60871-1&-2 and IEC 60931-1&-2.
1.5 WARRANTY

warranty period
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
extra materials to Employer.
1. Fuses: 2% of each type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 CAPACITORS, GENERAL
A. Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase groups and
mounted in metal enclosures.
B. Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be encapsulated
in thermosetting resin inside plastic container.
C. Capacitors shall comply with IEC 60831, with an internal loss factor not exceeding 0.5 x 10(-
3) (a consumption of about 0.5 watts per kVAR).
D. Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.
E. Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed in each

phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the following:
1. Interrupting Capacity: 120,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor manufacturer.
3. Fuses shall be provided with a monitoring facility for an immediate tripping after any
fuse is blown to prevent single phasing. The monitoring shall reset automatically after
the replacement of the blown fuse(s).
4. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has opened, but

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
is still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the enclosure.
F. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.
G. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid leakage from
capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting
indicated.
1. Indoor Enclosures: IP 21 to IEC 60529 or NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.
H. Anti Harmonic Reactors shall be provided in series with the capacitors and properly tuned to
limit the harmonic currents in order to avoid over loading the capacitors. The reactor rating
shall not exceed 7% of the capacitors to be protected.
I. Capacitor rating voltage shall not be less than 470 V at design indicated kVAR rating.
2.3 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION UNITS
A. Comply with IEC 60831-1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA ICS 2.
B. Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed in

independent enclosures as close as possible to/or within nominated switchboard requiring PF
improvement. Units include a separately mounted current transformer to sense current in the
power circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit controls.
C. Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor, adjustable to

any value between unity and 0.80 lagging. Controls continuously sense the power factor on
circuits being corrected and, when the power factor differs from the target setting for more
than 10 seconds, operate a contractor to switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit.
Contactors are opened or closed as required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer
to the target setting. Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.
D. Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:
1. Undervoltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects capacitors for
power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.
2. "Advance" and "Retard" push buttons on the control panel to permit manually
controlled capacitor-bank switching.
E. Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty in the capacitor
application.
F. Buses: Plated copper.
G. Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting wiring,
and capacitors.
H. Inductors: Iron-core-type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching surges to

within contactor ratings.
I. Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum fault
current to which they may be exposed.
J. Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
K. Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with controls
or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.
L. Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.
1. Indicated target and actual power factors.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3. Mounting: Flush or semiflush in unit door.
M. Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting conditions.
N. Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit.
1. Operating handle can be padlocked.
2.4 FACTORY FINISH
A. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with IEC 60831-
1,2 and IEC 60871-1,2 and IEC 60931-1,2 or NEMA CP 1. Include the following:
1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage, capacitance, leak,

and dissipation-factor tests.
2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in

Division 3.
B. Maintain minimum workspace according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

automatic power factor correction equipment installation and connections. Report results in
writing. Include the following:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuits have been energized, connect and observe
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
units to confirm proper operation.

2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Inspection: Perform external and internal inspections of capacitor equipment for damage and
for compliance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's documentation. Check
electrical and mechanical bolted connections for required torquing.
C. Testing: Perform the following and certify compliance with test parameters:
1. Test insulation resistance between capacitor terminals and case. Follow manufacturer's
written instructions or those below:
a. Use test voltages 500 V minimum, for equipment rated 250 V and less, and
1000 V minimum, for equipment rated more than 250 V.
b. Apply test voltage for 60 seconds.
c. Investigate, report, and resolve insulation resistance less than that stated by
manufacturer's literature or less than allowable 25 megohms for equipment rated
250 V and less and 100 megohms for equipment rated more than 250 V.
2. Measure capacitance of pole-to-pole capacitor combinations and compare with

manufacturer's published values. Report readings, and investigate and resolve
discrepancies more than 10 percent of manufacturer's nominal values.
3. Energize circuits and demonstrate electrical operating features of automatic power
factor correction units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Correct deficiencies shown by inspections and tests on site where possible, and retest;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
E. Report of Tests and Inspections: Written record including adjustment settings.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for optimum automatic power factor correction.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean components internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system
installation. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training and Closeout
Procedures."

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
SECTION 263353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes, on-line, static-type, continuous duty, solid state, double conversion
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system installation and static transfer switch,
comprising the following:
1. Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with 100% rated for continuous

automatic static switch and maintenance manual by-pass switch.
2. Input harmonic filter.
3. Output isolation transformer.
4. Power conditioner.
5. Interplant power and control cabling.
6. Connection of normal AC power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker, as
shown on the Drawings.
7. Earthing system.
8. Connection to BMS system for full monitoring, including proper interface digital
software link for remote monitoring from BMS for the points specified in this Section
and as detailed in BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings as a minimum.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.
C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit full technical data of equipment for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Manufacturers’ catalogues, detailed description, compliance with the Standards,

dimensions and weights, system operation, operating characteristics, methods of
operation, protective and control provisions, heat losses, ambient conditions and
limitations on electronic components, inverter cut-off voltage, battery calculation to
IEEE 485, etc. beyond which such components may suffer partial or permanent
damage.
to, the following:
1. Plans and front and side elevations, with indication of built-on control and indicating
devices and instruments, exact dimensions and weights, cabling etc.
2. One-line diagram with ratings of each piece of equipment, cabling, grounding etc.
3. Control and elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams and the like.
4. Installation and mounting details.
5. Batteries arrangement and mounting details.
C. Full load calculations based on the final approved equipment sizing.
D. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with

requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Test Certificates: Submit type test and routine test certificates. System shall undergo a
functional and load test program approved by the Engineer, and shall undergo a minimum 8
hours 'burn-in' test, under site simulated conditions, prior to shipment.
H. Field Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements,
and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.
I. Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 01. Include the following and to the satisfaction of Employer’s requirements:
1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended being stored at

Project site for ready access.
2. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
J. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
K. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
A. Manufacturer’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in manufacturing of on

line, double conversion three phase UPS modules specified in this document with a
minimum of twenty years documented worldwide experience and shall have a nationwide
first party service organization. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and shall
design to internationally accepted standard.
B. Factory Testing: Prior to shipment the manufacturer shall complete a documented test
procedure to test all functions of the UPS modules and batteries (via a discharge test), when
supplied by the UPS manufacturer and guarantee compliance with the specification. The
manufacturer shall provide a copy of the test report upon request. Tests shall comply to IEC
62040-3 and include but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Light load test.

2. AC input failure test.
3. AC input return test.
4. Transfer test.
5. Full load test.
6. UPS efficiency test.
7. Unbalanced load test.
8. Balanced load test.
9. Short-circuit test.
10. Harmonic components test.
C. Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of
current manufacture, and have not been in prior service, except as required during factory
testing. All active electronic devices shall be solid state and not exceed the manufacturers
recommended specified tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum reliability.
All semiconductor devices shall be sealed. All relays shall be provided with dust covers.
The manufacturer shall conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and final
products.
D. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is an authorized representative of UPS

manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
E. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
F. Standards: Installation shall comply with the following standards:
1. IEC 62040-1,2&3 “Uninterruptible Power Systems”.

2. IEC 61000-3-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-4: Limits - Limitation
of emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage power supply systems for equipment
with rated current greater than 16 A”.
3. IEC 61000-4 “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Testing and Measurement
Techniques”.
4. IEEE 485 “IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for
Stationary Applications”.
5. IEC 62310 “Static Transfer Systems”.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES

of emission of harmonic currents in low-voltage power supply systems for equipment
with rated current greater than 16 A”.
of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply
systems, for equipment with rated current ≤16 A per phase and not subject to
conditional connection”.
Immunity for industrial environments”.
Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments”.
G. Materials and components shall be manufacturer's latest design, and Standards used shall be
approved prior to manufacture.
A. Deliver equipment in fully enclosed vehicles after specified environmental conditions have
been permanently established in spaces where equipment shall be placed.
B. Prior to shipping all products shall be inspected at the factory for damage.
C. Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturers' ambient

temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
D. Equipment containing batteries shall not be stored for a period exceeding 3 months without
powering up the equipment for a period of 8 hours to recharge the batteries. . Relevant
Certificate for the batteries production date shall be submitted to the engineer.
A. Temperature limits within which equipment shall be designed to operate are zero to +40
deg. C at 100% rated output.
1.8 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
B. Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty shall be passed through to the final customer
and shall have a minimum period of one year.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide and deliver to client stores manufacturer's recommended spare parts for
one-year operation of UPS system. Spare parts shall include as a minimum complete set
(5%) of fuses for all types and ratings along with 5% spare cooling fans (minimum one).

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Tools and Instruments: Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine
inspection, testing, operation and general maintenance, as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System: UPS system shall be online, continuous duty, double conversion, class VFI-SS-111
to IEC 62040-3.
B. System shall be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory
capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting
parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified by the Engineer. UPS shall
be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system
operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault.
The system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software and
data.
C. General: System shall be interposed between normal AC power supply and critical load, to
secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up for number of minutes
stipulated in drawings in case of failure of normal AC supply and maintain output voltage,
frequency and phase deviation within specified tolerances.
D. System shall be 100% fully rated, single, for number and capacity as shown on drawings;
which implies complete UPS unit(s) with two sets of battery strings operating in parallel for
each unit for ratings up to 80 kVA and two to four sets of battery strings in parallel for each
unit for ratings above 80 kVA unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer. UPS shall be maintained (continuously supplying load through
the inverter), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source (bypass)
in case of failure or overload on rectifier- battery-inverter system. System shall employ
decentralized bypass technique so that each UPS unit shall be provided with its own static
bypass transfer switch. Each UPS unit shall be provided with its own master controller.
Master and slave configuration is not acceptable.
E. Normal AC power supply will be available from one protected source fed from either
normal AC network or from AC Characteristics of output of generator set (when provided)
and UPS system shall be coordinated for best results. Study and advise on special
requirements of generator characteristic output and stability.
F. Separate filters shall be provided for each rectifier/charger unit separately to limit the THD
to less than 7% this applies for all load currents from 25 to 100% of full load.
G. System overall efficiency shall not be less than 92 % at full load.
H. Noise level of complete assembly shall not exceed 65 dB(A) at 1.0 m distance anywhere
within UPS room.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Under normal conditions inverter(s) shall be synchronized and phase locked to normal AC
supply. Upon loss of normal AC supply, battery shall continue supply of no-break power to
inverters, which then free-run on self- generated UPS frequency reference. Upon restoration
of normal AC supply, inverters shall re-synchronize to AC line, gradually (at slew rate), if
frequency and voltage deviation of normal AC supply is within preset limits specified.
B. Automatic Transfer To Bypass: Static transfer switch shall automatically transfer critical
(100%) load from inverter to by-pass source (which is normal AC supply) if:
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics fall outside specified limits.

2. Critical load exceeds overload rating of UPS.
3. Over-temperature is sensed.
4. Manual (push button) command is given.
5. Transfer to by-pass mode shall be inhibited, and an alarm initiated if voltage,
frequency and/or phase shift of bypass power is outside acceptable tolerances.
C. Re-Transfer To Inverter: Re-transfer of critical load from auto by-pass source to inverter
(UPS mode) is only to be possible under the following conditions:
1. Inverter output voltage characteristics return to within specified tolerances.

2. Original load current reduces to within rated full load capacity of UPS.
3. Re-transfer selector switch is in automatic position.
D. Lock-out feature shall inhibit re-transfer if by-pass source conditions are outside preset
tolerances or if UPS output and by-pass are not synchronized and phase locked or if UPS
output is not restored to normal conditions.
E. Normal Power Restored: When normal power is restored following an outage,

rectifier/charger shall initially draw no power except for transformer in-rush current and
shall gradually continue providing power to the inverter and recharging the battery. After
approximately 15 seconds (walk-in time), input power requirements shall rise to power level
to drive critical load and recharge battery.
F. Automatic Restart: When normal power is restored to normal conditions following an

outage and after a complete battery discharge, the UPS shall automatically restart and
resume supplying power to the connected load via the inverter.
G. Provide maintenance disconnecting switch fully rated to carry the full load input current of
the UPS.
2.4 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
A. Rectifier/Charger Input:
1. Nominal Input Voltage: 380V, three phase, 4 wire, 50Hz.

2. Voltage input variation: +10%, -15% from nominal.
3. Frequency: +/-5% from nominal.
4. Transformer Exciting Current In Rush: Less than 600 % nominal current.
5. Power Factor: minimum 0.9 lagging at full load and nominal input voltage.
6. Total Feedback Current Harmonics: Maximum 7 % for UPS ratings above 20kVA
and 8% for UPS ratings 20kVA and below.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
7. Current Limiting: 115% max. of that required to operate inverters and charge battery
at full rated load, adjustment possible between 100% and 125%.
8. Walk-in Current in Rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds.
B. Rectifier/Charger Output:
1. Float and Equalize Operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible with battery.

2. Regulation: +/-1% max. from 0-100% load.
3. Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 to 100% resistive load).
C. Static Inverters:
1. Nominal net system power output rating in kVA: as shown on drawings with load
power factor 0.8 lag.
2. Nominal output voltage: 380 V, three phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz, adjustable +/-5% of
nominal.
3. Output voltage regulation:
a. Balanced load: +/- [1]% (0 - 100% load)

b. Unbalanced load (3-phase output only): +/-[3]% (at each 10% of load)
4. Phase Displacement: 120 deg. (+/-3 deg.) at 100% load unbalance.

5. Output Voltage Waveform: 5% max. total harmonic, 3% max. single harmonic.
6. Frequency Stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-
[[6]adjustable ranges; free running at +/-0.5. Full battery voltage variation, load and
p.f. range; slew rate shall not exceed 0.1 Hz/sec.
7. Dynamic Output Voltage Tolerance Sudden Full Load Removal: +/-10] % max.
recovering application or to within 1% in less than 40 milliseconds.
8. Over-load Rating: 125% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, 1000% for 5 cycles,
105% continuous.
9. Load crest factor without derating (Ipk/Irms): 3:1
D. Automatic Static Bypass Transfer Switch:
1. Transfer Time: 150 microsecond (overlapping) maximum.

2. Total Sensing and Transfer/Retransfer Time: 2 milliseconds, maximum.
3. Retransfer Mode: automatic/inhibit (selectable).
4. Retransfer Delay: 2 - 32 secs. in auto mode (selectable).
5. Transfer Point: +/-10% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
6. Retransfer Point: +/-5% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
7. Transfer Inhibit Point: +/-20% of nominal output voltage (adjustable).
8. Bypass circuit shall be provided with backfeed protection to IEC 62040-1 through
internal backfeed contactor to prevent feedback to the mains from the inverter in case
of mains failure and a fault in bypass circuit.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.5 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Materials and Parts: Electronic devices shall be solid state, hermetically sealed. Indicator
lights shall be twin LED type, those denoting blown fuse conditions shall be seen by
operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. Power connections and remote
alarm and control wiring shall be accessible at terminal boards. Power semi- conductors
shall be fused. Metal surfaces including copper and aluminium heat sinks and busbars shall
be treated with permanent protective coating. Electro-mechanical power devices and relays
shall be vacuum impregnated, insulated for maximum operating voltage conditions, and
enclosed in dust-tight enclosures. Cables shall be fire resistant high temperature grade.
B. UPS shall be provided with a socket connection for a serial interface to be linked to a
portable PC, to a modem or to the BMS system for communication with the UPS. It shall
enable interrogation of the UPS about status, faults, data stored, reprogramming, etc.
C. Housing: Equipment shall be housed in a free-standing, well ventilated, totally enclosed

modular assembly with front accessible lockable doors, giving easy access for maintenance,
inspection and adjustments, and with provisions for handling and lifting during and after
installation. Enclosures shall be suitable for industrial, tropical environments, protection IP
21 to IEC 60529, of galvanized sheet steel construction treated against corrosion and with
light grey RAL7032 baked paint or epoxy finish to approved standard.
D. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates shall be made of bakelite
E. Sub-assemblies and components shall be mounted on pullout and/or swing-out trays, of the
plug-in type where possible. Where it is not possible to mount components in pull-out or
swing-out trays, they shall be easily accessible inside the enclosure. Assemblies shall be
replaceable without requiring any adjustments or settings in the UPS.
F. Ventilation: For units rated over 3 kVA, an integral, forced-air, cooling system shall be
provided in each UPS module to remove dissipated heat efficiently, and ensure components
operate within environmental ratings. Air shall enter bottom of cabinet through replaceable
filters, and exhaust through the top. At least two fans shall be provided for ventilating each
enclosure. No degradation of performance shall occur in the event of a single fan failure.
Temperature sensors, mounted on semi-conductor heat sinks, shall initiate alarm if
maximum working temperature is exceeded.
G. Rectifier/charger unit shall be as follows:
1. Active front end (AFE) Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) or 6-pulse silicon
controlled rectifier (SCR) type for UPS ratings up to 40 kVA.
2. IGBT type UPS ratings 40 kVA and up to 200 kVA.
3. IGBT or 12 pulse SCR type with filter for UPS ratings above 200 kVA.
H. The unit shall have mainline circuit breaker and a rectifier input transformer for 12 pulse
UPS, and shall be automatic with soft start-up (walk-in) feature, using IGBT with vector
control design or silicon controlled rectifiers (SCR) with control logic circuitry to control
firing angles to SCR to suit power output requirements and protect against primary power
surges, lightning transients, under-voltage and over-voltage conditions. Output shall be
passed through LC filters to DC bus.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
I. Rectifier/charger unit shall be microprocessor based and capable of supplying full load
power to inverter, and to charge the battery from a discharge condition to 90% charge within
ten to twelve hours, and maintain full charge at floating voltage until next operation. The
rectifier/battery charger shall employ input AC current limiting as well as battery charge
current limiting for battery protection. Charger current shall be voltage regulated and current
limited. The control of the optimum charging method shall be completely controlled by the
charger’s microprocessor.
J. Inverter shall employ IGBT technology in three leg, vector control or high frequency
switching and real time control technique, and complete with output transformer and filters.
Inverter start-up shall be automatic, to reach full voltage within milliseconds and deliver
power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter shall start at any load including short-circuit.
Inverter shall be provided with an inverter output transformer. For UPS ratings 200kVA and
below transformer-less technique may be used, subject to Engineer’s approval.
K. Inverter oscillator shall operate and maintain output frequency of inverter within specified
tolerances, and be capable of synchronization and phase-locking to normal power supply
frequency. When inverter is phase-locked to normal power supply, and latter fails,
oscillator shall automatically revert to free running state (quartz oscillator) and maintain
specified limits.
L. Automatic static bybass transfer switch shall be continuously rated at full load (100% FL),
hybrid type (make-before-break), solid state transfer device with logic thyristor assembly
isolatable or completely removable for maintenance. When signal to close switch is
initiated, thyristors shall instantaneously conduct power to prevent deviations and breaks in
load voltage outside specified tolerances.
M. Integrated Maintenance By-Pass Switching: Manual (make-before- break) by-pass switch

shall allow load to be transferred to by-pass source without interruption of output, and
provide isolation of UPS and static switch during maintenance. Test position shall permit
testing of static switch while load is being fed from bypass power circuit. Transfer inhibited
warning circuit shall be provided to give an alarm indication in case by-pass supply is
beyond acceptable tolerances. External maintenance bypass setup shall be as shown on the
UPS Schematic Diagram included in drawings.
N. Rectifier input and bypass isolating transformers shall be provided for all UPS ratings 80
kVA and above.
O. UPS inverter output, IGBT rectifier input and bypass input transformers shall be two-
winding type, while 12 pulse rectifier input transformers shall be three winding type.
P. Transformers shall be galvanically isolated dry-type, Class H insulated, with metallic

electrostatic shielding, and high efficiency (98% or higher) type. Transformers shall be
installed either within the UPS enclosure or in a separate enclosure as applicable and
approved by engineer.
Q. Protection: UPS modules shall have built-in or inherent electronic current-limiting

protection against permanent self damage effective down to short-circuits. Fast acting,
current limiting devices shall protect against failure of any solid-state component. Internal
failure in any UPS module shall cause immediate isolation from input and output by
operation of static interrupters or causing shut down of faulty module. Protection shall be
provided against, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Input over and under voltage and power line surges

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Output over voltage and voltage surges

3. Sudden abnormal changes in output load conditions
4. Short-circuits at output terminals
5. Inverter and rectifier overcurrent
6. Auxiliary Control Circuit Overcurrent.
R. UPS Bypass and Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry the full load phase current.
S. Input Passive Filter Disconnection: UPS control system shall not disconnect the input
passive filters unless the UPS is operating at light loads (less than 25%).
T. Battery: High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic
encased, sealed lead- acid (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing
explosion proof safety vents. Electrolyte specific gravity shall not exceed 1.25 when fully
charged at 25 deg. C. Ampere-hour rating shall be sufficient for emergency period specified
with all inverters operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.75 V
per cell. Cells shall be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Guaranteed life shall not be
less than 10 years, with a capacity drop down to not less than 80% under normal expected
service.
U. Battery Cabinet: shall be factory assembled from UPS manufacturer, of welded construction
and formed from heavy gauge steel with added supports to retain cabinet squareness and
integrity during harsh shipping and handling conditions, Adjustable battery rails or trays
shall be provided to allow for multiple battery configurations and facilitate battery upgrades
in the future, Heavy duty polyester strapping material shall be used to tie down batteries,
Cabling shall be routed down the sides of the cabinet, away from the front of the batteries
allowing full access for easy maintenance, series wiring shall be routed efficiently and
neatly with tier to tier jumpers located at front batteries allowing for safe and easy
maintenance, Cabinets shall be top coated with a hybrid epoxy-polyester powder coat and
oven cured for a chip and corrosion resistant long lasting finish, All circuit breakers used on
the cabinets shall be rated to 600 VDC. Each battery string shall be provided with its own
circuit breaker for the individual string fault protection and disconnecting means. Battery
cabinet enclosure degree of protection shall be IP 20.
V. Battery checking system shall be provided for each UPS to check the battery continuity and
improve life time through regular automatic test and measurements for battery status,
voltage and current. System shall provide a predictive and automatic diagnostics of battery
health, optimize the recharge time and provide an advance warning about the end of battery
life upon detection of a weak / defective battery.
W. The battery cells age, at the time of delivery into site, shall be less than three months.
X. Battery calculations according to IEEE 485 shall be carried out by UPS supplier and
submitted for approval, based on the following:
1. Nominal active power factor of not less than 0.8 Lag.

2. Temperature factor for operation at 25 Deg C.
3. Aging factor of 1.25.
4. Design margin factor of 1.1.
5. Recharge time up to 90% of its capacity within 10 to 12 hours.
Y. Mimic Panel: UPS assembly shall include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays,
indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
Z. Local panel instruments shall include at least the following (digital readings):
1. Inverter input voltage: measuring DC bus voltage.

2. Battery current: measuring charge / discharge currents.
3. AC voltage: measuring inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or system
output.
4. UPS output measurements: for current, voltage and frequency.
5. Remaining battery backup time.
6. Input voltages.
7. Input current.
8. Total power.
9. Total harmonic distortion on input feedback current (THDi).
10. Total harmonic distortion on input voltage (THDv).
AA. Local Panel Indicators shall include at least the following:
1. System on battery supply.

2. Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal
AC supply input.
3. Static switch on normal AC supply (bypass mode).
4. Static switch inhibited.
5. Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers,
rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit).
6. Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure of
any stage, DC bus earth fault, inverter output earth fault.
BB. Local built-in controls shall include at least the following:
1. Inverter on/off.
2. Battery input circuit breaker.
3. Auto/manual reset-test switch.
4. Manual reset switch.
5. Hybrid switch transfer test push-button.
6. Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to
inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to
inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode.
7. Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0 - 30 hours adjustable, with
automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to be
used only with manufacturer's recommendation for type of battery specified).
8. Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to
maintenance personnel only).
9. Indicator test/reset switch.
10. Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only).
11. Alarm test-accept-reset.
CC. Local built-in alarms causing horn to sound, with tripping command if required, shall
include at least the following:
1. Fan failure: Alarm only.

2. Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe
preset period.
3. DC Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication.
4. Fuse Failure: Alarm.
5. Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
6. Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if prolonged, for each rectifier/inverter
unit.
7. Normal AC Supply Failure: Alarm only.
8. Hybrid Switch Operation to by-pass Mode: Alarm only.
9. Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.
DD. Input active harmonic filter shall be provided to limit input current harmonic distortion to
less than 7% THD at all load currents from 0 to 100% of full load and improve power factor
to not less than 0.9. The input filter shall be mounted inside the UPS cabinet or in a separate
enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Bases: Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of
equipment are constructed in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings and
equipment manufacturers' drawings and that holes for fixing bolts and provisions for
passage of cables etc. are provided as required.
B. Ensure installations locations are clean, dry and secured prior to installation. Vent and fire
detection/ protection recommended to be operational.
C. Built-In Items: Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage
of feeders and cables which shall be built into concrete foundations, bases or building
structure are provided as and when required and that they are properly installed.
D. Tools: Use only tools recommended by equipment manufacturers for installations,

particularly in making connections and adjustments.
E. Supervision: Carry out equipment installation under the direct supervision of a qualified
technician, licensed by and trained at the factory. Final adjustments and putting into
satisfactory operation shall be made by a specialist delegated by the factory.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Provide direct interference free grounding circuit in accordance with Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding" of the Specification.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and wiring according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical

Materials and Methods."
3.4 BATTERY EQUALIZATION
A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
UPSs.
required by the Governing Regulations and Standards. Carry out any other tests the
Engineer may require to check safety and compliance of installation with specified
requirements.
D. Tests: Tests shall be witnessed and certified by manufacturer’s authorized representatives, as

acceptable for results.
E. All inspection and tests must be witnessed by the Employer and Engineer and technical
representatives stipulated in Specification Section 260500, Clause 3.12, and it is not allowed
to operate any equipment without approval and attendance of the Engineer/Employer.
G. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each
component of the UPS:
1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:
a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.

b. Component type and labeling verification.
c. Ratings of installed components.
2. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm
functions.
3. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.
H. Power Supply Output Disturbance: Provide microprocessor based instrument, and monitor
and record power supply output disturbance of voltage and frequency. Instrument details
shall be submitted for approval.
I. Test Periods shall be prolonged (over 24 hours) and as requested by Engineer, to verify and
obtain realistic voltage and frequency profile under any loading and switching conditions
within the criteria specified.
J. Data logging shall include high and low average voltage, sags and surges, spikes and spike
bursts, drop-outs, high and low frequencies etc. with print-out and storage on cassette tape
for subsequent re-entry into instrument's memory for display or print-out.
K. Tests shall include loads at various power factors from low-load to overload condition, and
measurements of temperature, heat losses, output voltage, wave shape, and harmonic
content and frequency stability.
L. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
M. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and
inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and
inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.
N. Equipment Failure: Repair and make good any damage to equipment caused by tests or
damage to building caused by failure of any part of the installation, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
O. Product installed to be certified by manufacturers or authorized representative as “fit for

energisation”.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training ".
Maintenance Data."
advance notice.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT TRANSFER SWITCHES
SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:
1. Automatic transfer switch.

2. Bypass/isolation switch.

2. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for circuit breakers.Division 23 Section "Building
Management System".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Technical Data: Include ratings and dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices, and material lists for each switch specified.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.

D. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch,

power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer
switch and bypass/isolation switch.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit closing
and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.
1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.


Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
with requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01 and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements. Include all features and
operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List all factory settings of relays and
provide relay setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable.
H. Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
A. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a locally
established and authorized organization which can be called upon for professional advice
and maintenance as may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy the
Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch and related
control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC 60947-6.
D. Comply with UL 1008, NFPA 70 and NFPA 110.
1.5 WARRANTY

A. Local factory acceptance tests of equipment under this Contract are subject to be witnessed
by the Engineer for locally assembled equipment only in the presence of Original
Equipment Manufacturer. Witness test shall include complete routine and function testing
on all units to be witnessed. Test procedure and program shall be submitted for approval
prior to test conduction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.2 MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
A. Type: Conforming to IEC 60947-6 and to applicable standards, capable of frequently

switching mixed motors and resistive loads with utilization category AC33B to IEC 60947-
6-1 or equivalent. Wall or floor mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal
construction to control cubicle, comprising switching and controls necessary for automatic
transfer of power supply from normal source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control
relay and time delay relays, auxiliary switches and indicating lights etc. as necessary for the
required operation of the system.
B. class PC with double throw single switch and having rated short time withstand and short
circuit making current to IEC 60947-6-1, based on short circuit level of the network at
equipment location. As an alternative, two single throw contactors ATS may be used subject
to Engineer’s approval, if obtained from a reputable manufacturer and fulfils the test
requirements of class PC to IEC 60947-6-1.
C. Operation: When voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting
(80- 100%) of normal supply, for an adjustable period of 1 - 300 seconds, power failure
relay shall actuate engine starting control. After an adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from
sensing stabilized rated voltage and frequency of secondary source at the ATS, (Voltage
pick-up adjustable from 85% to 100% nominal), frequency pick-up adjustable from 90% to
100% nominal, the ATS shall transfer to the emergency position. Upon restoration of
normal mains supply to above the preset limits, adjustable between 90% and 100% of rated
voltage and/or frequency, for an adjustable preset period of 2 - 30 minutes, the ATS shall
transfer the load to normal position.
D. Transfer mechanism shall be powered from the source to which the load is being
transferred.
E. Utility to utility or two energized sources ATS shall automatically operate as described in
clause 2.2C above. The ATS shall be provided with a preferred source selector switch
marked “source 1”, “source 2”.
F. Pilot Lights shall indicate all ATS positions and sources available.
G. Instruments shall include voltmeter and ammeter with selector switches.
H. Automatic Retransfer: automatic retransfer selector switch marked “AUTO”, “MANUAL”

shall be provided. On manual position, automatic retransfer is disabled, while it is enabled
in the auto position.
I. Degree of Protection: ATS shall have an IP31 degree of protection to IEC 60529 for indoor
installations.
J. Wiring: Moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips
and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring shall be used on all
hinged/draw-out components.
K. Connections shall be made at front insulating terminal blocks with no live metal exposed.
Power cables shall terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive
specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates shall be provided.
L. Metal Cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
M. Earthing: Earthing bar shall be provided for connection of protective earthing conductors,
using set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
N. Ferrules: Wire ends shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
O. Interface monitoring and control points with BMS shall include at least the following.
Coordinate with the points listed in Division 23 Section “Building Management System”
and with BMS schedules:
1. Normal position.
2. Emergency position.
3. Bypass position.
4. Supply voltage availability for normal, emergency & bypass positions.
2.3 ATS WITH MANUAL BYPASS SWITCHES
A. Provide Manual Bypass Switches to combine manual and automatic transfer operation with
a drawout isolation system. Bypass switch shall consist of non-automatic Kirk-key
interlocked switches or circuit breakers, fully rated, manually operated and rated for same
loads as automatic transfer switch.
B. Bypass switch shall provide bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a
selector switch and a permanently mounted external lever, mechanically interlocked to
prevent paralleling of sources.
C. Bypass switch shall be of the make-before-break type. A dead source lockout shall prevent
any possibility of bypassing the load to an unenergized source.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounted Switch: Level and anchor unit to floor.
B. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."
3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches as recommended by the manufacturer. Increase raceway
sizes at no additional cost to Employer if necessary to accommodate required wiring.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by the Standards.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Tests: After installation is complete and prior to Substantial Completion, carry out all tests
E. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing in addition to tests

recommended by the manufacturer:
1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:
a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to phase and phase-to-ground with

insulation-resistance tester. Include control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified
minimum resistance.
b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
c. Inspect For:
1) Physical damage.
2) Proper installation and connection
3) Integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
d. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

e. Perform manual transfer operation.
2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function

for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.
b. Verify time-delay settings.
c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control
settings.
d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-
switch operations.
e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,
transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and
engine cool-down and shutdown sequence.
F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and
measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each
tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
G. Testing and commission of the ATSs shall be according to manufacturers' recommendations

to ensure the functionality of the ATSs as stipulated in the specifications and drawings.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the ATS. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Demonstration and Training ".
Maintenance Data."
advance notice.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURE
SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes lightning protection for buildings and associated structures and
includes requirements for lightning protection systems components including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Air Termination Network.

2. Down Conductors & Connections to reinforcing bars of structures.
3. Earth Termination Network.
4. Bonding.
5. Accessories.

3. Division 26 Section "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links earth point and rods,
connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories forming part of the lightning
protective system.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail the lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations,
conductor routing and connections, and bonding and earthing locations and provisions.
Include indications for use of raceway and sleeves, and data on how concealment
requirements will be met.
C. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate nature of soil, special earthing arrangements, date
and particulars of additives to soil or in bore-holes if used, test conditions and results
obtained.
D. Records: Submit the following:
1. Actual layout and components of the system.

2. Nature of soil and characteristics and any special earthing arrangement.
3. Test conditions and results.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
other information specified or required by Engineer.

with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in installing

lightning protection systems similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. IEC 62305 "Protection Against Lightning".

2. IEC 62561 "Lightning Protection System Components".
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems

and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials,
metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.
1.6 TERMS USED
A. The following terms used on Drawings and in the Specification are synonymous and may be
used interchangeably:
1. "Earth" and "Ground".

2. "Earthing" and "Grounding".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components that comply with IEC 62561
and with approved manufacturer's standard design, in accordance with published product
information and the Standards specified in this Section.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
B. Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps, fasteners,
earthing plates, earthing rods, rod clamps, splicers and other components required for a
complete system that meets the Standards specified in this Section.
C. Roof Conductors: bare, high conductivity, annealed Aluminum strip, 25 x 6 mm.
D. Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, bare annealed copper tape, 20 x 3 mm minimum

dimensions, or 50 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable covered with PVC of approved
color.
E. Accessories: Supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links, etc., shall be copper or
copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and connectors shall be
specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting to the various shapes and
surfaces of bonded metalwork. Provide bimetallic connectors between different materials.
Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and bolts will not be accepted on copper
installations.
F. Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 20 x 3 mm, suitable for bonding
flat surfaces, cut to length required and with drilled flat terminals for bolted connections.
Provide special bimetallic alloy terminals for joining to aluminum conductive parts.
G. Down Conductors: High conductivity, copper 70 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable,
bare as shown on drawings.
H. Test Links: Two-bolt split-coupling, copper alloy, made to join two ends of down
conductor specified, as shown on drawings.
I. Lightning Strike Counters: Lighting strike counter to BSEN 62561-6 shall be provided to
detect and count the lightning strikes as part of the lightning protection system. To be sited
in a suitable position above the test link of the down conductor for periodic inspection. The
counter shall be able to record the time and date of the event as well as the peak current and
charge of the lightning discharge.
2.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The aluminum coping covering the roof parapets and upper structures shall be used as
natural components for lightning protection system air termination network, in accordance
with BSEN 62305.
B. Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of proper size for the protection level required on the
roof floor, and to be bonded / connected to the aluminum coping covering the roof parapets
and upper structures, as shown on drawings. Join all elements of lightning protective system
together.
C. Additionally, provide lateral air termination network around building façade at 60m above
FFL (+197.00 level) via the use of horizontal copper ring conductor (bare copper tape
25mm x 3mm) installed on +197.20 concrete slab embedded in the wall plaster, with
aluminum strike pads which shall be distributed along the facade of the building at +197.00
with a maximum spacing of 5 meters. These strike pads shall be connected to the ring
conductor, as shown on this drawing. The ring conductors shall be bonded / connected to the
down conductors, steel reinforcement and exposed metal parts as specified and required by
the standard.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Use Air Rods (Finials/Terminals) in the air termination network, dimensions as per the code
requirements; as necessary and/or shown on drawings.
E. Down Conductors: Spacing as shown on drawings Every down conductor shall:
1. Be embedded inside the structural columns as shown on drawings,

2. Be bonded to the structural reinforcement bars inside the structural columns, where
the down conductors embedded, in accordance with IEC 62305.
3. Have test link above earth (in the parking levels as shown on drawings) for testing
earth termination network.
4. Be protected against corrosion.
F. Joints and interconnections in earth termination network shall be exothermic welds.
G. Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning protection system
at points above the test joint (test link) to avoid side flashing. Metalwork includes but is not
necessarily limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structures, communication supports, metal
sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents, exterior metal staircases, metal
window frames, vent pipes, steel doors or door frames, main earthing terminal or bar of
electrical installation and reinforcing bars of concrete structures if these are in continuous
electrical contact.
H. Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such as water piping,
etc.), as follows:
1. As directly as possible to the earth termination.

2. Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
3. At nearest earth point or at nearest main earthing terminal or bar of protective
earthing system.
I. If direct bonding is not acceptable by authorities and/or parties concerned, SPDs shall be
used.
J. Test Links: provide a test joint on each down conductor at the connection of the earth
termination, (except when reinforced steel inside columns is used as natural down
conductor).
K. Surge Protection Devices where specified or required by drawings shall be as follows:
1. SPD’s test requirements shall be compliant with
a. IEC 61643-11 for power systems,

b. IEC 61643-21 for telecommunication and signaling systems.
2. Selection and installation of a coordinated SPD protection shall comply with
a. IEC 61643-12 and IEC 60364-5-53 for protection of power systems,

b. IEC 61643-22 for protection of telecommunications and signaling systems.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to IEC 62305.
B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to earth connections. Avoid sharp
bends and narrow loops.
C. Conceal the following conductors:
1. System conductors.
2. Down conductors.
3. Interior conductors.
4. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m of
building.
5. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning
protection components.
D. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices
and connections between conductors and other components.
E. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop

conductors to earthed metal bodies of building at 20m intervals.
F. Down conductors shall follow most direct path between air terminals and earthing
termination network, avoiding sharp bends and narrow loops. Where necessary, the
formation of loops in down conductors shall not violate the code restrictions in terms of the
gap formed across the loop.
G. Joints and Bonds: Clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound. Protect
joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material, and with
overlapping joints not less than 30 mm long. Provide as few joints and bonds as possible
and make mechanically and electrically effective by clamping, bolting or exothermic
welding. Cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds shall not be less than that of main
conductor.
H. Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance between
any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or the distance allowed
by the specified Standard, whichever is smaller.
3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion
in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such
materials.
B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
lightning protection system after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications
and standards.
cables.
F. Periodic Inspections: Perform periodic inspections during installation of lightning

protection systems and at Substantial Completion, the periodic inspections and tests shall be
repeated at fixed intervals as mentioned in BSEN 62305-3.
G. Electrical continuity of is to be checked.
H. Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and checked
against specified resistance.
I. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
J. Correct malfunctioning installations at Project site, where possible, and retest to

K. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
1. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

servicing, and maintaining lightning protection system components.
Maintenance Data."
advance notice.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes factory installed or field-mounted SPDs for:
1. Low-voltage (up to 1000 V) power distribution and control equipment whose specific
requirements are covered under Articles 2.2 to 2.6 inclusive.
2. Telecommunications and Signal Processing Equipment whose specific requirements
are covered under Articles 2.7 to 2.10 inclusive.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. In: Nominal discharge current.
B. Iimp: Impulse current.
C. Imax: Maximum discharge current.
D. Icw: Combination wave generator short-circuit current.
E. Uc: Maximum continuous operating voltage.
F. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-

voltage characteristic.
G. GDT: Gas discharge tube.
H. SAD: Silicon avalanche diode.
I. SPD: Surge protective device.
J. TOV: Temporary overvoltage.
K. Up: Voltage protection level.
L. Uoc: Open circuit voltage.
M. UT: Temporary overvoltage test value.
N. fG: Cut-off frequency is equivalent to the frequency which induces an insertion loss of 3 dB
under certain test conditions as per IEC 61643-21. Unless otherwise indicated, this value
refers to a 50 Ω system

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.
2. Copy of type test certificate in accordance with IEC 61643.
B. Energy coordination study between SPDs installed at different levels, as required.

with requirements.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
E. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals and to the satisfaction of
Employer’s requirements:
A. Manufacturer Qualification: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge

protective devices, of types and capacities required, and whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
B. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. IEC 62305
2. IEC 61643-11.
3. IEC 61643-12.
4. IEC 61643-21.
5. IEC 61643-22.
6. BS 7671 (IET Wiring Regulations – Latest Edition).
C. As an alternative, SPDs in compliance with UL 1449 is also considered.
A. Install certified “shock-guards’ on the equipment before shipping from the factory and shall
be retained in place till unpacked at site and inspected by Engineer, to ascertain whether the
“shock-guard” has been activated by any shock/impact during shipment.
1.7 WARRANTY

1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of substantial completion.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AC POWER SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Maximum continuous operating voltage (Uc) of the SPD shall be equal to 110% of the
nominal system voltage as a minimum or the next higher rating to ensure the ability of the
system to withstand temporary r.m.s overvoltage (swell conditions), unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings.
B. The SPD shall be suitable for a supply main’s frequency between 47 Hz and 63 Hz.
C. All installed SPDs shall be connected in common mode to eliminate overvoltage between
each phase and earth and between neutral and earth, unless otherwise specified.
D. SPDs shall have the following features and accessories:
1. Integral or external disconnector based on manufacturer’s specific coordination

tables.
2. Indication for protection status and end of life.
E. SPDs installed adjacent to the protected equipment shall have galvanized and electrostatic
painted enclosure and provided with suitable DIN rails for SPD and fused-disconnect switch
fixation, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
F. Generally, SPDs shall be installed as follows, unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings:
1. Type I SPDs shall be installed for roof mounted / outdoor equipment control panel,
unless otherwise recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Type III SPDs shall be installed integrated into:
a. Power distribution units supplying telecommunication equipment.

b. Outdoor LED type luminaires, SPD shall be series connected to avoid exposure
of the luminaries to surges after interruption of its SPD.
G. All SPDs shall be installed within or adjacent to the protected equipment within a distance
not exceeding 10 m. Where distance between two consecutive SPDs is less than 10 m, the
downstream SPD is not required unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3 Type I SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Type I surge protective devices shall utilize GDT/ ESG technology.
B. Type I surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the
Drawings.
C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11 Type I.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. SPD shall be tested for Iimp simulated with 10/350 microseconds waveform, with the
following parameters: Iimp 25 kA within 50 micro seconds, charge (Q) 12.5As within 5 ms
and energy (W/R) 156 kJ/Ohm within 5 ms.
E. Voltage protection level (Up) shall not exceed the impulse withstand voltage for the
protected equipment.
F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): Match the Switchboard short circuit level as a
minimum.
G. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 25 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
H. SPDs temporary overvoltage withstand shall comply with IEC 61643-11 requirements.
2.4 TYPE II SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Type II surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology.
B. Type II surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the
Drawings.
C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Type II.
D. SPD shall be tested with simulated 8/20 microseconds waveform, with nominal discharge
current In according to IEC 61643-11 requirements.
protected equipment.
F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): To be matching with the protected equipment
short circuit level.
G. Maximum Discharge Current (Imax): 40 KA with 8/20 microseconds waveform, unless

otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer.
2.5 Type III SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Type III surge protective devices shall utilize MOV technology and shall provide common
mode and differential mode protection to eliminate overvoltage between each phase and
neutral and between neutral and earth.
B. Type III surge protective devices shall be provided where specified or shown on the
Drawings.
C. SPDs: Comply with IEC 61643-11, Type III.
D. SPD shall be tested with a simulated combination wave of 8/20 microseconds waveform for
short circuit current and 1.2/50 microseconds waveform for open circuit voltage with Uoc 10
kV, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
protected equipment
F. Short Circuit Withstand Capability (Isccr): Match the Switchboard short circuit level as a
minimum.
G. Nominal Discharge Current (In): 3 kA with 8/20 microseconds waveform. Unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. The following information shall be provided by the manufacturer on the nameplate as a

minimum:
1. Manufacturer’s name and model number.

2. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
3. SPD Type and discharge parameters for each mode of protection declared by the
manufacturer:
a. Type I and Iimp in kA.

b. Type II and In in kA.
c. Type III and Uoc in kV
4. Nominal discharge current.

5. Voltage protection level.
6. Identification of terminals.
7. Compliance standards.
2.7 PROTECTION OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL PROCESSING

EQUIPMENT
A. Telecommunications and signal processing equipment, being sensitive devices susceptible

to destruction by surge voltages induced by lightning or by electrical switching operations,
shall be protected by SPD’s.
B. The SPD’s shall be deployed based on the source of the surge and its intensity at the
boundary of each lightning protection zone (LPZ 0A/0B/1/2) as defined by IEC 62305-4.
C. SPD’s shall be properly designed to take into account the surge energy that they will be
subjected to and to limit the transient over-voltages to safe levels for equipment within the
protected zone.
D. SPD’s shall be able to limit conducted interference to a safe level so that the immunity of
the protected terminal equipment is not exceeded in accordance with the requirements of the
immunity and the test set-up described in EN 61000-4-5. The voltage protection level has to
be adapted to the immunity of the equipment to be protected.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. SPD’s shall comply with the standardized test waveforms with peak currents used to test
SPD’s at each LPZ boundary given in IEC 61634-21 Table 3. Accordingly, each protective
device shall be labeled and tested to multiple categories and performance classes.
F. Identification, Documentation and Marking
1. Identification, documentation and marking shall be in accordance with IEC 61643-21:

2. The SPDs shall be clearly marked with the following items:
a. The Manufacturer's name or trademark.

b. Model number.
c. Manufacturing traceability.
d. The maximum continuous operating voltage.
3. The following information shall be either marked on the body of the SPD or included
in the submittals for review. For each test performed on the SPD, the test conditions
shall be stated in the documentation:
a. Manufacturer’s name or trademark

b. Year and week of manufacture, or serial number.
c. Model number.
d. Service conditions.
e. Maximum continuous operating voltage Uc (AC and/or DC).
f. Rated current.
g. Voltage protection level Up.
h. Impulse reset (if applicable).
i. AC durability.
j. Impulse rating (according to IEC 61643-21 Table 3 - category and
corresponding parameters e.g. C2: 2k V/ 1kA).
k. Transmission characteristics (appropriate to the intended SPD use).
l. Additional information such as surge currents In, Iimp, series resistance.
m. SPD Category and rating.
G. SPD’s for telecommunications and signal processing equipment may be classified into three
basic application groups:
1. Telephone and data transmission equipment.

2. Data processing networks.
3. Radio communication equipment.
2.8 SPD’S FOR TELEPHONE AND DATA TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT
A. Surge protectors for telephone and data transmission equipment are divided into three types:
1. Surge protectors for telecom networks.

2. Surge protectors for industrial networks.
3. Surge protectors for Local Area Networks (LANs).
B. Surge protectors for telecom networks.
1. Designed to protect telecom transmission devices such as PBX, modems, data

terminals.
2. Designed and selected to fit into the existing installations such as:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
a. Mounting on DIN rail.

b. Insertion in connection strips.
c. Wall mounting.
d. Mounting on telecom Main Distribution Frames.
e. Plug-in on termination outlets.
C. Surge protectors for industrial networks.
1. Equipment to be protected shall include but shall not be limited to:
a. Fire detection system

b. Access control system
c. Input / Output cards
d. Converters and interfaces
e. Actuators
f. Probes
g. Transmission systems
2. Surge protectors shall be designed to fit on DIN rail and shall be available in various
configurations, as required.
a. Number of protected wires: 1 wire or 2 pairs.

b. Plug-in modules: removable to facilitate maintenance.
c. Transmission and protection of the shield wire.
D. General Features of SPD’s for telephone and data transmission equipment:
1. SPD’s shall be based on a multi-stage hybrid design that combines a high discharge
current capacity with fast response time to provide:
a. A nominal discharge current greater than 5 kA at 8/20 μs impulse.

b. An ultra-fast response time < 1 ns.
c. Safe operation in end of life scenarios (fail-safe behavior: short circuit in case
of removal of device with no line-cut-off).
d. Low insertion loss.
E. Protection Configurations
1. Protection configurations shall be selected based on the type of network being

protected:
a. Standard Protection: Used mainly for the analog telecom network (PSTN):
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and fast

clamping diode.
b. Enhanced Protection: For very low voltage transmission lines.
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and 3-

pole clamping diode.
c. Line + Shield Protection: Transmission and protection for the shield wire.
d. K20 Protection: Complying with the ITU-T K20 International
recommendation:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, fast clamping diodes

and thermistors.
e. Low Capacitance Protection: For high bit rate links (> 1 Mbit/s):
1) A combination of a 3-electrode gas discharge tube, line resistors and 3-

pole low capacitance diodes.
f. Cat 6/Cat6A Protection: Designed for very high bit rate LAN (up to 1000
Mbit/s):
1) A combination of a 3-pole low capacitance diode and MOV.
2. Below Table shows characteristics of typical protection configurations of combined

lightning protection and surge arresters that shall be required at Service Entrances
(LPZ 0A-LPZ 2 or higher) of common building services. Final selected configuration
shall be based on type of line to be protected, number of lines to be protected and type
of installation in addition to the recommendations of the protected equipment
manufacturer.
Application
Telecom Industrial Industrial Industrial
Characteristic Modbus /
Telecom
RS485 / LON-Bus
systems, RS232
Profibus (Echelon)
ADSL, etc.
DP/FMS
Nominal Voltage (Un) 180V 12V 5V 5V
Maximum Continuous Operating DC
180V 15V 6V 6V
Voltage (Uc)
Maximum Continuous Operating AC
127V 10.6V 4.2V 4.2V
Voltage (Uc)
Maximum Current at 45 Deg. C (IL) 750mA 750mA 1000mA 1000mA
D1: Total lightning impulse current
10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
(10/350 μs) (Iimp)
D1: Lightning impulse current
2.5 kA 2.5 kA 2.5 kA 2.5 kA
(10/350 μs) per line (Iimp)
C2: Total nominal discharge current
20 kA 20 kA 20 kA 20 kA
(8/20 μs) (In)
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20
10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
μs) per line (In)
Voltage protection level line-line for
≤270V ≤50V ≤25V ≤25V
Iimp D1 (Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth
≤550V ≤37V ≤550V ≤550V
for Iimp D1 (Up)
Voltage protection level line-line at 1
≤250V ≤38V ≤11 ≤9
kV/μs C3 (Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth at
≤550V ≤19V ≤550 ≤550
1 kV/μs C3 (Up)
In-line resistance 1.8 ohms 1.8 ohms 1.0 ohms 1.0 ohms
Cut-off frequency line-line (fG) 25 MHz 2.7 MHz 100 MHz 1 MHz
Wiring 2 pairs 4 wires 2 pairs 2 pairs

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.9 DATA PROCESSING NETWORKS
A. Ethernet network surge protectors shall be designed for computer networks with very fast
data transfer speeds, up to 1 Gbit/s networks of Category 5E/6/6A and PoE / PoE+
installations.
B. Surge protectors for Local Area Networks (LAN’s) shall be based on a combination of 3-
pole gas tubes and fast clamping diodes.
C. Surge protectors shall be equipped with standard data processing connectors (such as RJ45
connectors) and shall be available in either a single enclosure to protect terminal equipment
or to fit in a 19’’ rack to protect at the switch level.
D. Video Transmission
1. Video Transmission shall be protected at the remote equipment level as well as at the
local digital recording devices.
2. Surge protectors for video transmission shall be designed to support different
configurations:
a. Analog Cameras: combining analog video and power supply protection into a
single unit.
b. IP Camera: combining Ethernet and power supply protection in a single unit.
c. Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Video: designed for Power Over Ethernet
applications.
E. The installation of surge protectors on data-processing networks shall be applied in

accordance with IEC 61643-21 in areas of high electromagnetic disturbance, inter-building
networks and wide area networks.
F. Below Table shows characteristics of typical protection configuration for SPD’s at transition
from lightning protection zone (LPZ 0B to LPZ 2 and higher). Final selected configuration
shall be based on type of network, application voltage level and data transmission speed.in
addition to the recommendations of the protected equipment manufacturer.
Application
Characteristic Industrial Ethernet, PoE+, Cat 6,
Class EA
Nominal Voltage (Un) 48V
Maximum Operating DC Voltage (Uc) 48V
Maximum Operating AC Voltage (Uc) 34V
Maximum Continuous DC Voltage Pair-Pair
57V
(PoE) (Uc)
Nominal Current (IL) 1A
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 μs) line-
150A
line (In)
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 μs) line-
2.5 kA
earth (In)
C2: Total nominal discharge current (8/20 μs)
10 kA
line-earth (In)
C2: Nominal discharge current (8/20 μs) pair-
150A
pair (PoE) (In)
Voltage protection level line-line for In C2 (Up) ≤190V

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
Voltage protection level line-earth for In C2

≤600
(Up)
Voltage protection level line-line for In C2
≤600
(PoE) (Up)
Voltage protection level line-line at 1 kV/μs C3
≤145V
(Up)
Voltage protection level line-earth at 1 kV/μs
≤500V
C3 (Up)
Voltage protection level pair-pair at 1 kV/μs
≤600V
C3 (PoE) (Up)
Insertion loss at 250MHz ≤2.0 dB
Transmission class to EN50173-1 Class EA
Wiring 8 wires + shield
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with IEC 61643-11, IEC 61643-21 and BS 7671.
B. For equipment installed at the roof / outdoor, coordinate with the equipment manufacturer
for surge protection requirements according to the recommendations of the equipment
manufacturer.
C. Leads / wires shall be routed through the shortest straight parallel path. Wires shall be
twisted type to reduce conductor’s inductance.
D. Install SPDs such that the total SPD lead length(s) and size(s) along with the distance
between the SPD and the protected equipment does not exceed the values required by IEC
60364-5-53 or recommended by manufacturer for proper operation whichever is more
stringent.
E. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
G. Wiring:
1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
H. Telecommunications and Signal Processing Equipment
1. To be effective, surge protectors shall be installed in accordance with the following

principles:
a. The grounding point of the surge protector and that of the protected equipment
shall be inter-connected.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
b. Protection shall be installed at the network entrance to divert impulse currents

as fast as possible.
c. The protected equipment shall be located near the surge protector (less than
10m). If this rule cannot be achieved, secondary protection shall be installed
near the equipment for coordinated surge protection.
d. The grounding conductor between the ground output of the protector and the
installation bonding circuit shall be as short as possible (less than 50 cm) and
shall have a cross-sectional area of at least 2.5 mm².
e. The ground resistance shall comply with Project Specifications.
f. Protected and unprotected wires shall be kept apart to limit the potential for
coupling.
2. In an equipotential bonding network and to reduce the residual voltages during

lightning discharge currents, the connection of Radio communications protector to the
bonding network shall be as short as possible (less than 50 cm) and shall have a
proper cross sectional area of at least 4 mm².
surge protective devices after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and
standards.
cables.
F. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative.
1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and

Specifications.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written
installation requirements.
G. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs
installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect
them immediately after the testing is over.
C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer’s maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs. Refer to

Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training & Take-Over Procedures."

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior
building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, mounting provisions and
connection to circuit wiring and to corresponding lighting control equipment.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices".
3. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF WORKS:
A. All indoor lighting fixtures shall be supplied by the Employer (except for the Elevators’ Car
lighting which shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor).
B. Contractor's scope of work shall include all installation works pertaining to the lighting
fixtures to ensure proper and trouble-free installation, operation and functionality of the
indoor lighting installations as per the design intent.
C. For demarcation between Employer and Contractor regarding the lighting fixture, refer to
ANNEX – 2 "Schedule of Free Issue Items" of the Contract Agreement.
D. For installation works pertaining to the lighting fixtures that shall be supplied by the
Employer, it is the Contractor's responsibility, without limitation, the supply and installation
of:
1. Other fixations & supporting materials like suspension rods & metal rings as well as
those not associated with lighting fixtures and necessary for proper lighting fixtures'
installation
2. Termination / connection to dedicated outlet including terminals, lugs and all
necessary accessories for lighting fixtures' installation & operation
3. Wires including protective earthling conductors, conduits, trunking, pull boxes,
junction boxes, and other raceways and fittings from outlet back to upstream outlet, to
lighting switches or to final branch circuit panel board
4. Any other materials or works required for the proper installation / operation
5. Coordination with the Employer and Lighting Suppliers for the factory assembled
mounting accessories that will be associated with the lighting fixtures to ensure
proper and trouble-free installation of fixtures

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
6. Contractor shall submit shop and construction drawings, as detailed hereinafter in

clause 1.5, for approval to Employer & Engineer.
E. The supply and installations of Elevators' car lighting complete with all LED modules,
remote drivers, control gears, control modules, transformers and the like shall be part of
Contractor's scope of works, and hence the whole specification section shall be applicable.
F. Lighting Fixtures Schedules:
1. For indoor lighting fixtures' description within the back of house and parking levels,
refer to Lighting Fixtures Schedule included in the Electrical Drawings.
2. For indoor lighting fixtures' description within the front of house spaces and
apartments, refer to Architectural Finishes (AF) drawings, schedules and reports.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer's
name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principles
2. Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and
to the Specification
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves,
coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc.
4. Dimensions of fixtures.
5. Certified results of accredited manufacturers’ laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps
for photometric performance.
6. For LEDs: Photometric test reports from accredited manufacturer’s laboratories shall
be submitted verifying the luminaire photometric characteristic; the testing shall
conform to LM-79-08 or similar and approved international equivalent standard.
Report shall include laboratory name, report number, date, luminaire catalogue
number, luminaire, light source specifications, etc.…
7. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric
performance.
8. LEDs control gears.
9. Energy-efficiency data.
10. Life, output (lumens, Color temperature, and CRI) and energy efficiency data for
lamps.
11. Photo biological risk assessment for LED fixtures.
12. Types of lamps.
B. Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit Drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling
features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and
pertinent to the installation.
2. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
3. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
4. Wiring details, circuit and panelboard references, special lighting control
arrangements and control schematic diagrams, etc...

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
5. Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, features, location and size of each
field connection and accessories. Detail wiring for power, signal and control wiring
for fixtures and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
6. Remote drivers' locations, where the distance between the drivers and fixtures shall
not exceed that recommended by drivers' manufacturers. Contractor shall hence
verify with ballast manufacturers the maximum distance between driver and
luminaire in accordance to drivers' manufacturers' recommendations.
7. Exact lengths of linear fittings to guarantee that Employer will supply of the linear
lighting fittings.

manufacture’s authorized representative and the Contractor.
D. Samples: a sample will be required for the purpose of ascertaining its performance, quality
of parts and details, maintenance features, method of installation and safety features.
Samples must be wired for simple plug-in operation for evaluation purposes. Samples to be
shipped prepaid by the Contractor to the Employer’s Representative, or as otherwise
advised. No payment shall be required for samples, and will be submitted at no additional
cost to the Employer. Samples submitted for evaluation purposes will not be returned unless
a prepaid shipping number is provided by the Contractor, nor are they to be included in the
quantities listed for the project.
1. For each sample fitting submitted, submit photometric data from an independent
testing laboratory, of the submitted sample.
2. All sample fittings must be tested and CE labeled and bear such label affixed to each
fitting in such a position as to conceal it from normal view.
3. Fitting samples and photometric data shall be submitted for final review within thirty
(30) days after receipt of reviewed shop Drawings. If after a period of thirty (30)
days from submittal of sample, the fitting cannot be made acceptable, then a fitting,
(shop drawing and sample), by one of the additional Manufacturers specified, shall be
submitted for review at no extra cost to the Employer.
E. Construction time permitting, and then only with the written acceptance of the Employer’s
Representative, sample fittings may be submitted for review of workmanship and material
finishes only, prior to the submittal of the complete working sample. The approval of a
sample for workmanship and material finishes, does not negate the requirement for
submission of the complete working sample including photometric data and UL label.
F. Installation instructions.
G. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and
coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and other
components in the vicinity. Include work of all trades that shall be installed near lighting
equipment.
H. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that products

comply with requirements and that all lighting fittings and fitting Drawings have been
coordinated with the Drawings and details of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical,
Mechanical, and other related trades to assure an accurate and efficient installation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
I. Closeout Submittal:
1. Maintenance Manual: Prior to the completion of the project submit, for incorporation
into the overall project maintenance manual, recommended maintenance
requirements from the Manufacturers of each fitting type, including:
a. A quantity of two (2) of any special tools required.

b. Types of cleaners to be used.
c. Replacement parts identification lists and contacts for all fittings, including all
lamping.
d. Recommended maintenance schedule and procedures.
J. Addressable Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying

that ballasts are compatible with the central battery systems and equipment with which they
are used.
K. Compatibility Confirmation: Signed by manufacturers of lighting fixture, lamp and control-

gear respectively clearly assuring compatibility with each other’s equipment.
L. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
M. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

with requirements.
N. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

lighting, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
O. List of recommended spare parts, consumable items and maintenance special tools, and their
Contractor has to obtain and submit a written undertaking from the manufacturer that the
A. Fixture Design and Standards: The Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures shall be manufacturer's standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with the
Drawings and/or Schedule of Lighting Fixtures and complying with IEC 60598 and BS EN
55015.
1. All luminaires and Lighting fixtures shall be provided with a permanent label within
the luminaire clearly identifying, the name of the manufacturer, the model name and
model number, the country of origin, the IP rating of the fixture the type, rating and
number of lamps to be used and the year of manufacture.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Design Layout: Fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans
shall be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members,
ducts, pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Recommended
manufacturer clearances shall be ensured during installations. Certain fixtures are shown in
provisional positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings. Such
fixtures shall be located in coordination with final equipment layout so that illumination is
as intended by the design.
B. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting
fixtures with specific ceiling system in each area and other construction to ensure that space
exists for installation and removal of lighting fixture.
1.7 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment that fail in materials or workmanship; that
corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar
radiation during the specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage,
hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty
coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Conventional Luminaires: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for LED Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
5. Ballasts and transformers shall be warranted for a minimum of three years, or that
period offered by the ballast Manufacturer, whichever is greater. Replacement of
faulty materials, and the cost of labor required to make the replacement shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fully Equipped Lighting Fixtures: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
2. Ballasts and Control Gears: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
3. Replaceable LED Lamps: 3% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. Generally: Construction and wiring of fixtures shall comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures shall be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer's name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label shall be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
B. Lighting Fixtures (Luminaires): Manufacturer's standard, as given in Lighting Fixture

Schedules shown on the Drawings and/or Specifications, or equal. Fixtures shall include
respective control gear and/or transformer, mounting accessories, lamps, and as required for
complete installation and proper operation.
C. Sheet Steel Housings: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker
when required by the Specification or the Standards.
D. Sheet Steel Reflectors: Electro-galvanized sheet steel, Not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. Aluminum Reflectors: Not less than 99.5 % purity and not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless
otherwise approved.
F. Fabrication: Metalwork shall be mitered, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs. Flat metal parts shall be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication.
Metal parts shall have finish free from irregularities.
G. Rust-proof Ferrous Base: Ferrous metal parts shall be bonderized (treated with corrosion
resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before
application of final finish.
H. Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: Approved baked enamel paint. Paint color on
fixture frames and trims shall be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I. Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: White baked enamel paint having reflection factor not
less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, shall be highly polished, anodized
aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J. Mechanical Resistance of Finish: After finish has been applied on steel surfaces and cured,
it shall withstand a 6-mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or
loosening from base metal.
K. Resistance of Finish to Ultra-Violet: Finish shall withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-

violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping, and
shall retain the same reflection factor after exposure.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
L. Heat Resistance: Finishes, wires and components inside fixtures shall be certified materials
to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures (105 deg. C).
M. Lamp Cap Temperature Rise Test: Comply with IEC 60360 when testing discharge lamps
for compliance with the limits for each type of lamp.
N. Wiring Inside Fixtures: Not less than 0.5 mm2, heat resistant (not less than 105oC) wires,
450/750 V insulation. Wiring shall be terminated on screw type, fixed, insulating, heat
resistant (not less than 105oC) ceramic terminal blocks. Internal wiring inside luminaire
shall be neat and fixed to the body by “Snap-On” type fixings and harness.
O. Hinges: Fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers shall have concealed hinges and
catches, and stain-less steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products may
be submitted for approval.
P. Suspension Aligners: Provide for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment shall be minimum 25 mm.
Q. Recessed Fixtures: Construct to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting fixture or
ceiling. Metal rings shall be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
R. Recessed down light fixtures shall be provided with “trims” to architectural approval and
shall not have visible fixing screws or clips.
S. Outdoor Fixtures: Non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
T. Removal of parts for maintenance shall be possible without removing fixture housing.
U. Connector adaptor shall be provided with each fitting male/female, where applicable.
2.3 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHTING SYSTEM
A. Light emitting diode shall be a solid-state device embodying a p-n junction, emitting optical
radiation when excited by an electric current. It shall be part of the LED module which is
supplied as a light source. Output color consistency shall be guaranteed and have a Color
Rendering Index (CRI) greater than 80 measured in accordance with IES LM-79-08, unless
otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. LEDs shall have an efficacy of 90 lumens per watt as a minimum measured in accordance
with IES LM-79-08, Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid-
State Lighting Products.
C. Luminaire shall have a measured efficacy of 75 lumen per watt as a minimum at ambient
temperature 40° C, thermal test is to be conducted to verify the luminaire efficacy.
D. Guaranteed rated life (L70 / L80 as per the specified fixture) shall be not less than 50,000
hours at specified ambient temperature, and as per IES LM-80-08, Approved Method:
Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
E. LEDs shall comply with Photo-biological Safety of lamps and lamp systems in accordance
with the requirements of BS EN 62471:2008. Provide a test report to prove the fixture is
classed as “Exempt” or “Risk Group 1”.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a two-step MacAdam Ellipse for indoor
luminaires and five-step maximum for outdoor luminaires to ensure color consistency
among luminaires.
G. EMI/RFI shall meet BS EN 55015 requirements.
H. The maximum percentage of direct up-light from the outdoor luminaires shall be as CIE
126-1997.
I. Housing shall incorporate an adequate heat sink, the design of the heat sinks shall be such
that there is a direct thermal path from the led junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a
thermal transfer effect throughout the life of the luminaire which ensures the overall fittings
and the LEDs are kept relatively cool.
J. Electronic control gear for LED modules: high efficiency, high power factor, suitable for
operation at the ambient conditions specified for the project. Control gear shall have
constant output current or constant output voltage over the whole wattage range independent
of mains supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient for operating the number
and wattage of LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life of the control gear shall be above
50000 hours.
K. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and secondary sides.
Secondary cables from the control gear to LED modules shall be provided by the LED
supplier. Maximum length between control gear and LED module shall be as per
L. LED control gear shall be protected against electric shock, accidental contact with live parts,
short circuit, overload, over temperature where the output current is reduced if the
temperature limit is exceeded and shall be earthed (protection class I).
M. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in order to maintain the
light output of the LED by increasing the LED driving current over the lifetime.
N. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384 and shall
meet the limits of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with
radio interference suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of
IEC 61547.
2.4 EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE
A. Exit luminaires shall be installed along the defined escape routes and shall be visible from
all points of the escape route. The luminaires shall be placed above each exit door, at each
intersection with other escape routes and corridors and near each change of direction. Unless
otherwise stated, all exit luminaires shall be operated via an emergency central battery
system (ECBS).
B. All exit luminaires shall have metal body and shall have pictogram legends as per DIN
4844/CEN TC 169 or markings as per local civil defense requirements with viewing
distance of 36 m or 16 m based on the length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built
according to EN 60598 and shall have a contrast factor of 0.2.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Special focus shall be given to the location of the safety luminaires to cover specific hazards
and to highlight safety equipment installed. Intersections with other corridors, changes in
floor level, staircases (each flight has to receive direct light), fire alarm call points and
operation equipment, firefighting equipment and other life safety equipment as identified.
D. Safety luminaires shall be as well installed in toilets with areas more than 8 sq. m, toilets for
disabled, covered car parks, electrical control or plant rooms, and in other areas where
hazards are encountered by the occupants of the facility. All areas shall be illuminated with
a minimum uniformity factor of Emin/Emax = 1/40 and minimum lighting level to 10.8 lux.
E. Unless otherwise stated, this lighting level shall be achieved by integrated safety luminaires
operated by an emergency central battery system. This shall be best achieved by using high
frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load or with light output reduction to 50
percent in emergency mode or by the use of incandescent luminaires. This ballast shall be
fitted on the part of normal lighting designated as emergency lighting.
F. All exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible
addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built-in or
separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label
(red/white) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed.
G. All safety and exit luminaires shall be built according to EN 60598; electronic ballast to EN
60298/60294 and EN 60924/60925, EMC protection to EN 55015. The electronic ballast
with monitoring facility and easy accessible address module shall have an automatic cut-out
fuse for failures within the lamp circuit. All electronic ballasts for the EIT and safety
luminaires shall be manufactured by the emergency lighting system manufacturer.
H. Whenever the main lighting fixtures are used as emergency lighting, Contractor shall ensure
coordination between both manufacturers for compatibility and addressability of the system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Generally: Install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installation.
B. Ensure that luminaire is positioned so that it can be removed and re-fixed without having to
disturb other equipment.
C. Fixture Support: Provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers
etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet boxes
to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation.
Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually
mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
D. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum
distance between ballast and luminaire.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
E. Stem Hangers: Provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems
shall have suspension aligners and shall be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at
required height.
F. Suspended Ceilings: If ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures without

strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure. Certification from
the suspended ceiling manufacturer is required.
G. Where down lights are fixed into suspended ceilings, the upper surface of the ceiling shall
be provided with a suitable metal plate of minimum 1.2 mm thickness on which the
luminaire-fixing clamp shall rest. This is to avoid the clamp from damaging the ceiling
surface.
H. Where separate control gear is used, it is not permitted to be fixed directly to suspended
ceilings. They are required to be provided with a suitable metal tray for mounting and shall
not be located more than 300 mm away from the luminaire except where specifically
permitted otherwise.
I. Cable entry into luminaire shall be through a bushing/stuffing gland.
J. Solid Ceilings: Coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions
and structural elements.
K. Continuous Rows: Arrange fixtures so that individual fixture can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
L. Cover Plates: Install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure
when left unused.
M. Flush Recessed Fixtures: Install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
N. Ventilation: Keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the design
of the fixture. Ensure that the final circuit connection is adequately protected against heat
transfer from fixtures.
O. Earth metal frames as described in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding".
P. Tightness: Ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when installed, and
completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather conditions. Installation of
fitting and termination of circuit wiring should not invalidate the ingress protection rating.
Q. Lamps for Permanent Installation: Place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to hand-
over and when instructed by Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service shall not be used
for final lamping of fixtures.
R. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each
fixture.
S. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture.
Locate not more than 150 mm from fixture corners.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner.
T. All lamps and lighting fixtures shall be installed by authorized electrical technicians wearing
protective hand gloves.
U. All fixtures containing emergency lamps shall be clearly labeled with approved yellow
labels having black lettering, indicating the source and circuit number.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
cables.
F. Visual Inspection: Check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and nameplates

etc.
G. Illumination Measurements: Taken after 100 hours “burn-in” at selected/approved locations,

to determine level and uniformity.
H. Operation: Check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
I. Electrical Data: Measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations with
discharge lamps.
J. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
K. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
L. Provide calibrated instruments to make and record test results. Calibration shall be valid for
at least another 6 months at the time of the test.
M. Tests: As follows:
1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Conduct illumination level measurement for normal and emergency lighting.
5. Report results in writing.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
N. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
O. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period or defect liability period whichever is
later.
P. Lighting fixture manufacturer/authorized representative shall inspect, witness site test and
certify the results of tests report.
3.3 AIMING, ADJUSTMENT AND PUNCH LISTING
A. Aiming and Adjustment: Provide labor and materials for final aiming and focusing of all
adjustable fittings under the Employer’s Representative’s supervision. All aiming and
adjusting shall be carried out, after the entire installation is complete, unless otherwise
approved by the Employer’s Representative due to construction scheduling. The Contractor
shall provide the personnel and equipment for this task, in accordance with all applicable
union agreements. All aiming and adjusting shall be per the direction of the Employer’s
Representative. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screw, and nuts and bolts
shall be tightened securely.
B. Night Work: Where possible, fittings shall be focused during the normal working day;
however, where daylight interferes with: aiming; or the ability of the Employer’s
Representative to ascertain illumination levels; aiming shall be accomplished at night, at no
additional cost to the Employer.
C. Punch Listing: During aiming and focusing the Employer’s Representative shall punch list
the work.
D. Timing: Aiming and adjusting shall be appropriately scheduled by the Contractor, so as to

allow for sufficient time to correct punch list items observed, and if necessary additional
aiming and adjusting, prior to occupancy by the Employer.
3.4 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. A factory-employed engineer shall make a minimum of three site visits to ensure proper
system installation and operation. The first two visits, visit shall consist of a system formal
check-out; upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely
commissioned by a factory-employed engineer. The check-out will be performed after all
loads have been tested live for continuity and freedom from defects. The third visit shall:
demonstrate and educate the Employer's representative(s) on the system capabilities,
operation, programming, and maintenance to be coordinated by the Contractor. Training of
Employer’s representatives shall not exceed two working hours per fitting type. Additional
training shall be available upon request.
B. The factory representative shall be responsible for addressing all fittings and shall provide
replacement fittings if there are areas with inconsistent color matching.
C. No power is to be applied to the LED system unless specifically authorized by written

instructions from the manufacturer.
D. The purchaser shall be liable for any return visits by the factory engineer as a result of
incomplete or incorrect wiring.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.5 CONTRACTORS' SERVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
1. Installing of all specified lighting equipment, providing all materials and works
required for the proper installation and operation.
2. Taking field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the
architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.
3. Providing, installing and terminating all distribution circuits and all feeder circuits for
the specialty lighting system.
4. Terminating all distribution circuits onto the relays.
5. Terminating of power distribution cable.
6. Providing and installing of all conduit, junction boxes, electrical wireways and cable
trays required for the lighting distribution systems.
7. Providing two weeks written notification to the Manufacturer prior to the time
factory-trained personnel are needed on the job site.
8. Providing and pulling all necessary wires / cables in conduit.
9. Cleaning all racks, panels and boxes of dirt, dust and debris.
10. Furnishing sufficient workmen and all necessary equipment to access light fittings
and other fitting and/or system accessories to assist in all tests at final checkout.
11. Furnishing sufficient workmen and all necessary equipment to access light fittings
and other fitting and/or system accessories to assist in focusing of all theatrical light
fittings both prior to the Employer’s Representative’s visit and during the Employer’s
Representative’s commissioning.
12. Working night-time hours to focus fittings when required.
13. Shouldering liability for any return visits by the Manufacturer as a result of
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy
by Employer.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable fixtures to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours
for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.
1. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, poles/support
structures, and accessories and related power distribution and control, protective earthing
and related builder's work including column foundations, cable pits, cable trenches and
ductwork.

2. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems".
3. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems".
4. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices".
5. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for interior fixtures, lamps, ballasts,
emergency lighting units, and accessories; for LED Luminaires and for exterior
luminaires normally mounted on buildings.
6. Division 23 Section "Building Management System" for Obstruction Lights interface
with BMS.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF WORKS:
A. All indoor lighting fixtures shall be supplied by the Employer (except for the Handrails'
lighting which shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor).
B. Contractor's scope of work shall include all installation works pertaining to the lighting
fixtures to ensure proper and trouble free installation, operation and functionality of the
indoor lighting installations as per the design intent.
C. For installation works pertaining to the lighting fixtures that shall be supplied by the
Employer, it is the Contractor's responsibility, without limitation, the supply and installation
of:
1. Other fixations & supporting materials like suspension rods & metal rings as well as
those not associated with lighting fixtures and necessary for proper lighting fixtures'
installation
2. Termination / connection to dedicated outlet including terminals, lugs and all
necessary accessories for lighting fixtures' installation & operation
3. Wires including protective earthling conductors, conduits, trunking, pull boxes,
junction boxes, and other raceways and fittings from outlet back to upstream outlet, to
lighting switches or to final branch circuit panel board
4. Any other materials or works required for the proper installation / operation

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
5. Coordination with the Employer and Lighting Suppliers for the factory assembled
mounting accessories that will be associated with the lighting fixtures to ensure
proper and trouble free installation of fixtures
6. Contractor shall submit shop and construction drawings, as detailed hereinafter in
clause 1.5, for approval to Employer & Engineer.
D. The supply and installations of Handrail' lighting complete with all LED modules, remote
drivers, control gears, control modules, transformers and the like shall be part of
Contractor's scope of works, and hence the whole specification section shall be applicable.
E. Lighting Fixtures Schedules:
1. For obstruction lights description, refer to Lighting Fixtures Schedule included in the
Electrical Drawings.
2. For exterior lighting fixtures description, refer to the Exterior Lighting Fixtures
Schedule included in the Electrical Drawings (Exterior Lighting Package)
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support,

including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.
B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s),
when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect
lamps, and to connect lamps to power supply.
C. ECAR: Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulations.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete data for approval
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture, lamp and control
gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification,
overall dimensions, operating characteristics and principles, and any modification to a
standard product if applicable
2. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including shape,
base/mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc, cross-sections, design criteria and calculations,
brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-out or circuit-breaker etc.
3. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar curves, coefficients of
utilization, efficiency and depreciation factors certified by approved, internationally
accredited, independent photometric testing laboratory.
4. Materials, finishes, and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
5. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical
ratings and photometric data, including IP rating certification.
6. Obstruction lights certificates from the manufacturers certifying their compliancy to
ICAO & FAA.
to, the following:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Layout of equipment in exact positions with mounting and construction details,

concrete foundation dimensions and reinforcement, routing and sections of duct-
banks and trenches, backfill and packing material, earthing rods etc.
2. Cabling and wiring diagrams, single line drawings, loads, phase distribution,
protection and control, earthing and the like.
3. Calculations of illumination and glare levels, based on CIE methods.
4. Remote drivers' locations, where the distance between the drivers and fixtures shall
not exceed that recommended by drivers' manufacturers. Contractor shall hence
verify with ballast manufacturers the maximum distance between driver and
luminaire in accordance to drivers' manufacturers' recommendations.
5. All low voltage transformer and power supply locations.
6. Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, features, location and size of each
field connection and accessories. Detail wiring for power, signal and control wiring
for fixtures and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
7. Exact lengths of linear fittings to guarantee that Employer will supply of the linear
lighting fittings.

manufacture’s authorized representative and the Contractor.
D. Samples: a sample will be required for the purpose of ascertaining its performance, quality
of parts and details, maintenance features, method of installation and safety features.
Samples must be wired for simple plug-in operation for evaluation purposes. Samples to be
shipped prepaid by the Contractor to the Employer’s Representative, or as otherwise
advised. No payment shall be required for samples, and will be submitted at no additional
cost to the Employer. Samples submitted for evaluation purposes will not be returned unless
a prepaid shipping number is provided by the Contractor, nor are they to be included in the
quantities listed for the project.
1. For each sample fitting submitted, submit photometric data from an independent
testing laboratory, of the submitted sample.
2. All sample fittings must be tested and CE labeled and bear such label affixed to each
fitting in such a position as to conceal it from normal view.
3. Fitting samples and photometric data shall be submitted for final review within thirty
(30) days after receipt of reviewed shop Drawings. If after a period of thirty (30)
days from submittal of sample, the fitting cannot be made acceptable, then a fitting,
(shop drawing and sample), by one of the additional Manufacturers specified, shall be
submitted for review at no extra cost to the Employer.
4. Construction time permitting, and then only with the written acceptance of the
Employer’s Representative, sample fittings may be submitted for review of
workmanship and material finishes only, prior to the submittal of the complete
working sample. The approval of a sample for workmanship and material finishes,
does not negate the requirement for submission of the complete working sample
including photometric data and UL label.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying that products

comply with requirements and that all lighting fittings and fitting Drawings have been
coordinated with the Drawings and details of the Architectural, Structural, Electrical,
Mechanical, and other related trades to assure an accurate and efficient installation.
F. Closeout Submittal:

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1. Maintenance Manual: Prior to the completion of the project submit, for incorporation
into the overall project maintenance manual, recommended maintenance
requirements from the Manufacturers of each fitting type, including:
a. A quantity of two (2) of any special tools required.

b. Types of cleaners to be used.
c. Replacement parts identification lists and contacts for all fittings, including all
lamping.
d. Recommended maintenance schedule and procedures.

with requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 01 and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements.
I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed

lighting, in accordance with requirements of the Specification, Division 1.
A. Standards: Luminaires shall be of the highest international quality in material, workmanship

and finish and shall generally comply with IEC 60598 and the applicable CISPR
recommendations. Manufacturer shall verify and certify compliance with these standards
and the applicable local regulations and design standards.
B. Technical Requirements: Minor deviations from the Drawings may be considered for
improvement in construction details, but no changes are to be made without the written
approval of the Engineer.
C. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise specified, equipment is to be designed and derated

for continuous and trouble-free service at 40 deg. C ambient temperature and 100% relative
humidity, with temperature reaching 70 deg. C in direct sunlight and with high content of
ultra-violet rays. Equipment is to withstand full load operation whilst exposed to sun.
D. All lighting fixtures shall have test certification from approved, internationally accredited,
photometric laboratories.
E. Obtain specific written confirmation from luminaire, lamp and control gear manufacturers
on the inter-compatibility of the equipment/devices to each other and to the specific project
conditions.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1.7 WARRANTY

repair, restore or replace any defective equipment that fail in materials or workmanship; that
corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar
radiation during the specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage,
hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty
coverage.
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Ballasts and transformers shall be warranted for a minimum of three years, or that
period offered by the ballast Manufacturer, whichever is greater. Replacement of
faulty materials, and the cost of labor required to make the replacement shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
A. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 300 mm above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on poles until just before pole installation. Handle
poles with web fabric straps.
C. Luminaries shall be stored indoor in protective covering.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts: Provide items necessary for maintenance, and up to 5% (or nearest whole unit)
of installed quantities of each type of lamp, control gear, fuses, luminaire covers, special
bolts or nuts, lamp-holders and the like which are subject to burning, breakage or failure.
B. Furnish extra materials described below that match product installed and that are packaged
1. Fully Equipped Lighting Fixtures: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least one of each type.
2. Ballasts and Control Gear: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
3. Replaceable LED Lamps: 3% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2.2 FLOODLIGHTS
A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 65 to IEC 60529 (unless
otherwise shown on drawings), with aiming adjustment facility and “lock-in-place”
arrangement.
B. Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy (color shall be approved by the Engineer)
closed on front by hinged framed protector highly resistant to thermal and mechanical
shocks, and set in position by at least eight heavy duty stainless steel spring clamps with
silicon sealing gasket. Enclosure shall be in accordance with IEC 60598-2-5, and shall be
suitable for operation in specified ambient conditions.
C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum, secured in precision
aligned internal tracks to provide beam distribution required.
D. Connection box shall be located at rear of floodlight body with gland connections suitable to
accept the supply cables. Lamp and control gear to be mounted in two separate and isolated
compartments within the luminaire enclosure, unless specifically stated otherwise.
E. Control Gear: Plug-in type, 220 V, 50 Hz, power factor compensated to at least 0.9 lagging.
Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps selected. Ignitors
are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp shall be able to start with at least +/-10% line
voltage, and with normal operation dips up to 20% for four seconds. Compensation shall
ensure that there is no large increase in operating current during starting. Control gear
losses are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in control gear compartments are to
be single core 2.5 mm2 copper conductors with high temperature insulation and sheath.
Control gear shall be certified suitable for operation at specified ambient conditions and
provided with RF Suppression.
F. Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with U.V. stabilized, corrosion
and heat resistant paint (color shall be approved by the Engineer), resisting operating
temperatures attained in direct sunlight while lamp is burning.
G. Mounting: Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and mounted on

specially designed brackets to allow swiveling in any desired direction and locking firmly in
final position. Protractor scale shall be provided for accurate setting.
H. Earthing Terminals: Bolted earthing terminal shall be provided in each fitting.
I. All fixtures shall be clearly labeled by manufacturer, clearly stating make, model and
country of manufacture.
2.3 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
A. Obstruction lights shall be provided in accordance the latest editions of ICAO, FAA AC
150/5345-43, FAA Engineering Brief No. 67 and Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulations.
B. Obstruction lights shall provide the ICAO photometric performances for use as low-
intensity and medium-intensity, as shown on drawings. They shall also comply with FAA
specification L-810(L) & L-864(L)/L-865(L) respectively.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
C. Obstruction lights shall be provided with LED lamps. The lamps shall be suitable for
locations where vibrations are experienced. They shall be rated for 220 V, and procured
from reputed internationally recognized manufacturers and shall have a certified lamp life of
at least 50,000 burning hours at full intensity, and subject to the project environmental
conditions and to provide a long life fitting. The obstruction lights shall use LEDs as a light
source, with a manufacturer guarantee of 5 years.
D. The power supply boards of the obstruction lights shall include surge protection devices in
accordance to FAA EB-67.
E. The lamp failure shall be monitored by a relay and audio-visual alarm annunciated at a local
control panel and at a remote location (BMS Room) through interface with BMS, where
duly authorized technical/maintenance personnel are alerted to the alarm condition.
F. The transfer from Day to Night operation of Medium Intensity lights shall be monitored via
BMS, as per BMS Schedules included in the mechanical drawings.
G. The automatic activation and Day/Night Operation of the medium and low intensity
obstruction lights shall be via connection with photocell installed on building roof.
Obstruction Lights shall be equipped with all necessary relays / contacts for interface with
both BMS and photocell with remote override switch to enable to manual override
operation.
H. Alarm cabling shall be provided with protected containment to avoid damage.
I. Joints are not permitted in the power supply cabling to the aviation obstruction warning
lights.
J. Medium Intensity obstruction lights shall be provided with flasher control units, as per
ICAO. These units shall be provided with internal wiring using stranded copper conductor,
double insulated, 105 deg. C heat resistant type insulation and components certified for the
intended duty and ambient conditions in metallic enclosure with IP 65 rating.
K. Obstruction light flash rate shall be coordinated on site as per Annex 14and ECAR.
L. Obstruction light to be provided with integrated photocell and photocell controller.
M. All junction boxes/control panels/controller boxes used shall be metallic and rated IP 65.
The controller/relay unit enclosures shall be provided with corrosion treatment and powder
coated paint finish
N. Obstruction light system shall be suitable for 220Va.c. operation at specified ambient
conditions.
O. Obstruction light fixtures shall be metallic body with heat tempered glass cover.
P. The photometric of the lighting fixtures shall be tested and certified by an internationally
approved, independent testing laboratory.
Q. Obstruction lights shall be provided with internal components such as connection terminal
blocks, gaskets, lamp holders, etc. which are not degraded by heat / U.V. Radiation /
humidity, such as plastic, PVC, GRP, etc.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
R. Colors as necessary shall be obtained by coloration of the glass and not by usage of filters or
other material and all internal wiring shall be of stranded copper, double insulated, (105 0 C)
heat resistant type.
S. Obstruction light covers shall be provided with a non-degradable chain connection to the
body of the luminaire to avoid damage during repair, maintenance, etc. and the glass dome
covers/lenses shall be screw-on type.
T. All screws and bolts shall be provided with self-holding clips, to prevent loss of screw/bolt
after opening.
U. Obstruction light fixtures may be provided with external paint finish. If provided, dark
colors are not to be used and the paint material shall be certified for UV radiation withstand.
V. All fixing hardware shall be stainless steel.
W. Mounting of obstruction lights shall be designed for fixing to top of one conduit, 1 inch
diameter, or by means of a bracket.
X. All Obstruction lights and system shall be to specific approval of the Egyptian Civil
Aviation Authority.
2.4 LIGHTING COLUMNS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet steel, electrically
welded, and of height specified with one piece section. Columns are to have minimum wall
thickness of 3 mm at base. Sheet steel is to have minimum rupturing resistance of 37
kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2.
B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single arm bracket or other arrangement

required, supporting number of luminaires shown on the Drawings. Bracket arrangement is
to be designed to ensure that failure, due to wind induced oscillations, does not occur and
that rotation from desired alignment is not possible.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints, welds, bolts etc. are to be
designed to withstand gust wind velocity of 160 km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable
direction at a height 10 m above ground level, with column fully equipped. Fatigue of steel
is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, taking into account dynamic stresses due to
vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate thickness, is to be solidly welded onto lower edge
of column, and is to have specified number of holes for holding down bolts together with
central cable access hole not less than 150 mm diameter.
D. Stainless steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column.
E. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and outside surfaces of column
are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting and are to be free of grease. Steel components of
columns to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to
be 500 g/m2 on both inside and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91
/ 121 or BS EN ISO 1461. Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during erection by
wire brushing affected area and treating with approved rust converter to the satisfaction of
Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column base are to be coated with heavy
bitumen paint prior to erection.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Protection and Wiring: Bolted terminals and cable lugs are to be provided with 1 phase and
neutral terminals, for incoming and outgoing 1 phase 2-wire cable, and of the sizes shown
on Drawings. Wiring is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor
temperature. Cable size to be as shown on drawings.
2.5 CONTROL GEAR:
A. Electronic control gear for LED modules: high efficiency, high power factor, suitable for
operation at the ambient conditions specified for the project. Control gear shall have
constant output current or constant output voltage over the whole wattage range independent
of mains supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient for operating the number
and wattage of LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life of the control gear shall be above
50000 hours.
B. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and secondary sides.
Secondary cables from the control gear to LED modules shall be provided by the LED
supplier. Maximum length between control gear and LED module shall be as per
C. LED control gear shall be protected against electric shock, accidental contact with live parts,
short circuit, overload, over temperature where the output current is reduced if the
temperature limit is exceeded and shall be earthed (protection class I).
D. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in order to maintain the
light output of the LED by increasing the LED driving current over the lifetime.
E. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC 62384 and shall
meet the limits of main harmonic content as defined in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with
radio interference suppression limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of
IEC 61547.
F. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify with ballast manufacturers, maximum
distance between ballast and luminaire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment: Install equipment to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this but no changes are to
be made without the approval of Engineer.
B. Column Bases: Install columns on concrete bases as detailed on the Drawings. Before
commencement of construction, ensure that bases are suitable for column installation.
C. Holding Down and Plumb Adjusting Nuts, Washers, Locknuts or Nyloc Nuts: Stainless
steel or cadmium plated.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
D. Columns: Erect columns so that luminaires are located on a line parallel to theoretical
profile of road. Alignment of columns, both horizontally and vertically, shall be secured to
the satisfaction of Engineer. Brackets are to be set at 90 degrees to longitudinal axis of
road.
E. Install poles as follows:
1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding
concrete grout firmly packed in entire void space.
5. Use a short piece of 13-mm diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
F. Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and supports
to allow aiming for indicated light distribution.
G. Mounting Adjustments: After demonstrating to Engineer that specified lighting

requirements have been met, carry out final setting and locking in position of the
floodlights.
H. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
I. Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Replace malfunctioning lamps.
J. Cabling Conduits and Ductwork: Carry out in accordance with Division 26 Section "Low
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables". Cable ducts are to be directly buried
except at crossings with other service work or roads.
K. Provide labeling of luminaries using stainless steel labels fixed to adjoining surface with
suitable anchor screws.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
cables.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
F. Visual inspection shall include inspection of condition of each piece of equipment, quality
of workmanship, alignment, perpendicularity, labeling and the like, all in conformance with
the Specification.
G. Insulation resistance and continuity tests are to be carried out on each circuit and piece of
equipment before energization, with circuit breakers in the open position and lamps not
installed.
H. Operational tests are to be carried out on all circuit breakers and control gear, with lamps
installed, including recording voltage at terminals of ballasts on final columns of each
circuit and at distribution panel or the like.
I. Performance tests are to be carried out after 100 hours normal operation, and are to include
measurement of lighting and uniformity levels on required illuminated surfaces.
J. Other tests are to be carried out as required by the Engineer to verify conformity with the
Specification.
K. Earthing resistance tests are to include measurement of earth electrode resistance at final
points of circuits and continuity of protective conductors.
L. Results of tests are to be recorded on site and signed by witnessing parties.
M. Provide calibrated instruments to make and record test results.
N. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires
and energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
1. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated.

Use calibrated photometers.
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
3. Check excessively noisy ballasts.
O. Prepare a written, numbered report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications

indicating and interpreting results.
P. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground Equipment:
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values.
B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and

Bonding."
1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and foundations.

Connect luminaires to grounding system with conductor as shown on plans or in
accordance with Regulations.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
3.4 AIMING, ADJUSTMENT AND PUNCH LISTING
A. Aiming and Adjustment: Provide labor and materials for final aiming and focusing of all
adjustable fittings under the Employer’s Representative’s supervision. All aiming and
adjusting shall be carried out, after the entire installation is complete, unless otherwise
approved by the Employer’s Representative due to construction scheduling. The Contractor
shall provide the personnel and equipment for this task, in accordance with all applicable
union agreements. All aiming and adjusting shall be per the direction of the Employer’s
Representative. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screw, and nuts and bolts
shall be tightened securely.
B. Night Work: Where possible, fittings shall be focused during the normal working day;
however, where daylight interferes with: aiming; or the ability of the Employer’s
Representative to ascertain illumination levels; aiming shall be accomplished at night, at no
additional cost to the Employer.
C. Punch Listing: During aiming and focusing the Employer’s Representative shall punch list
the work.
D. Timing: Aiming and adjusting shall be appropriately scheduled by the Contractor, so as to

allow for sufficient time to correct punch list items observed, and if necessary additional
aiming and adjusting, prior to occupancy by the Employer.
3.5 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. A factory-employed engineer shall make a minimum of three site visits to ensure proper
system installation and operation. The first two visits visit shall consist of a system formal
check-out; upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely
commissioned by a factory-employed engineer. The check-out will be performed after all
loads have been tested live for continuity and freedom from defects and that all control
wiring has been connected and checked for proper continuity. The third visit shall:
demonstrate and educate the Employer's representative(s) on the system capabilities,
operation, programming, and maintenance to be coordinated by the Contractor. Training of
Employer’s representatives shall not exceed two working hours per fitting type. Additional
training shall be available upon request.
B. The factory representative shall be responsible for addressing all fittings and shall provide
replacement fittings if there are areas with inconsistent color matching.
C. No power is to be applied to the LED system unless specifically authorized by written

instructions from the manufacturer.
D. The purchaser shall be liable for any return visits by the factory engineer as a result of
3.6 CONTRACTORS' SERVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following:
1. Installing of all specified lighting equipment, providing all materials and works
required for the proper installation and operation.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2. Provide storage for necessary materials and equipment for installation of the control
system. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required
for proper and complete installation and operation of the control system, even though
every item may not be specifically mentioned. The Contractor shall deliver on a
timely basis to other trades any equipment that must be installed during
3. Taking field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the
architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed.
4. Installing all control equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s approved shop
drawings.
5. Testing all branch load circuits before connecting the loads to the control system load
terminals.
6. Providing, installing and terminating all distribution circuits and all feeder circuits for
the specialty lighting system.
7. Terminating all distribution circuits onto the relays.
8. Terminating of power distribution cable.
9. Providing and installing of all conduit, junction boxes, electrical wireways and cable
trays required for the lighting and control distribution systems.
10. Providing two weeks written notification to the Manufacturer prior to the time
factory-trained personnel are needed on the job site.
11. Providing and pulling all necessary wires / cablesEmployer’s Representative’s visit
and during the Employer’s Representative’s commissioning.
12. Working night-time hours to focus fittings when required.
13. Shouldering liability for any return visits by the Manufacturer as a result of
3.7 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust amiable luminaires and luminaires with adjustable lamp position to provide required
light distributions and intensities.

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER
SECTION 269999
LIST OF ELECTRICAL RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURE
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1‐ FURSE U.K.
2‐ ERICO GERMANY
3‐ WALLIS U.K.
4‐ HARGER U.S.A.
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

1‐ ERICO Germany
2‐ FURSE U.k
3‐ WALLIS U.K
4‐ HARGER U.S.A
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES

1‐ GENERAL ELECTRIC U.S.A.
2‐ EATON U.S.A.
3‐ LECTRO EGYPT
4‐ LS KOREA
5‐ SIEMENS VIETNAM
6‐ RTC RUSSIAN
7‐ SQUARED CHINA
8‐ POWER PAR U.A.E.
9‐ QBAR EGYPT
260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1‐ ENERGYA EGYPT
2‐ EGYPTIAN CABLES CO. EGYPT
3‐ ELSWEDY EGYPT
4‐ GC3 EGYPT
5‐ BELDEN (FOR SPECIAL CABLES) U.K.
6‐ BICC EGYPT.
7‐ MESC (FOR SPECIAL CABLES) K.S.A
8‐ ELFANAR CABLES (OPTIONAL) K.S.A
FIRE RESISTANT CABLES
1‐ PRYSMIAN Italy
2‐ FIRETEC U.K
3‐ CLEVELAND CABLE COMPANY U.K
4‐ DRAKA U.K
5‐ ELSWEDY EGYPT
6‐ PIRELLI ITALY
7‐ CAVICELL ITALY
8‐ GC3 EGYPT
9‐ ELFANAR CABLES (OPTIONAL) K.S.A
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
CABLE TERMINATIONS (FOR M.T.

CABLES)
1‐ RAYCHEM EGYPT
2‐ ELASTIMOLD U.S.A
3‐ ELSWEDY EGYPT
FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL
1‐ ROXTEC SWEDEN
2‐ STI U.S.A
3‐ HILTI U.S.A
L.V CABLES GLANDS
1‐ CM P U.K
2‐ PFLITSCH GERMANY
3‐ HAWKE U.K
4‐ 3M FOR THE FOLLOWING : ‐ U.S.A
 LV. CABLE TERMINATIONS.
 WIRE NUTS.
 CABLE MARKING.
 LUGS.
 CONNECTORS.
 CABLE ACCESSORIES. ETC.
OR APPROVED EQUAL
MANHOLE COVER & FRAME
1‐ GATIC NEENAH U.K
2‐ AL TAWAKOL (NTT) EGYPT
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

METAL CONDUITS & ACCESSORIES
1‐ ALLIED U.S.A
2‐ WHEATLAND U.S.A
3‐ FLEXICON U.K
4‐ BURN THAILAND
5‐ PANASONIC THAILAND
6‐ ELECTRIC‐FLEX CO. U.S.A
7‐ SMART GROUP Malasia
8‐ POWER MARKET (PENDING UL EGYPT
CERTIFICATE APPROVAL)
9‐ DELTA (PENDING UL CERTIFICATE EGYPT
APPROVAL)
P.V.C CONDUITS & ACCESSOIRES
1‐ MARSHALL EGYPT
2‐ EGA TUBE K.S.A
3‐ DECODUCT Duabi
4‐ ENGINEERING HOME EGYPT
5‐ AL‐REHAB EGYPT
6‐ NEW EGA EGYPT
7‐ EPS EGYPT
STEEL BACK BOXES
1‐ THOMAS & BETTS U.S.A.
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
2‐ STEEL CITY U.S.A.

3‐ 0.Z / GENDEY U.S.A.
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1‐ NOVO EGYPT
2‐ TECHNOLOGICAL EGYPT
3‐ EMECO EGYPT
4‐ ELSWEDY EGYPT
5‐ AL TAWAKOL (NTT) EGYPT
6‐ SOFTEX EGYPT
7‐ KAMA EGYPT
8‐ UNI‐TECH EGYPT
262726 WIRING DEVICES

SWITCHES & SOCKETS:
1‐ BTICINO Italy
2‐ Legrand France
3‐ ABB Europe
4‐ M.K Uk
5‐ JUNG
6‐ SCHNEIDER France
FLOOR BOXES:
1‐ LEGRAND France
2‐ ACKERMANN Germany
ALUMINIUM CABLE TRUNKING:
1‐ MK U.K
2‐ LEGRAND France
SINGLE PHASE DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES:
1‐ MK (LOGIC PLUS TYPE) U.K
2‐ LEGRAND U.K
3‐ EATON U.K
PASSIVE MOVEMENT PRESENCE
DETECTOR (PD):
1‐ LEGRAND France
2‐ LEVITON U.S.A
3‐ MK U.K
4‐ ABB Germany
6‐ JUNG Germany
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1‐ GENERAL ELECTRIC U.S.A.
2‐ Eaton U.S.A.
3‐ Siemens U.S.A.
4‐ KATKO FINLAND
5‐ SOCOMEC FRANCE
6‐ SQUARED U.S.A.
7‐ LEGRAND FRANCE
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
8‐ ABB FINLAND
263213 EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR

1‐ CATERPILLAR U.K
2‐ CUMMINS/ONAN U.K
3‐ SDMO FRANCE
4‐ MITSUBISHI JAPAN/UK/SINGAPORE
5‐ FG WILLSON U.K
6‐ MTU Germany
7‐ HIMOINSA Spain
263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES

1‐ ASCO U.S.A
2‐ 2. ZENITH U.S.A
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

U.P.S
1‐ VERTIV ITALY/SLOVAKIA
2‐ MGE FRANCE
3‐ APC U.S.A
4‐ GENERAL ELECTRIC POLAND
5‐ SOCOMEC FRANCE
6‐ PILLAR GERMANY
7‐ LEGRAND ITALY
8‐ HUAWEI CHINA
BATTERIES
1‐ HOPPECKE GERMANY
2‐ YUASA U.K
3‐ C& D U.S.A
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

1‐ ABB EGYPT
2‐ TESAR ITALY
3‐ ELSEWEDY EGYPT
4‐ SIEMENS GERMANY
5‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC FRANCE
6‐ CHINT CHINA
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

1‐ ABB ‐ARAB EGYPT
2‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC EGYPT
3‐ EMAS I SIEMENS EGYPT
4‐ DCS I SIEMENS EGYPT
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
1‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRICAL EGYPT
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
(PROVIDED THAT AllCIRCUIT

BREAKERS TO BE IMPORTED)
2‐ ABB EGYPT
(PROVIDED THAT AllCIRCUIT
3‐ LEGRAND ITALY
4‐ GE POLAND
5‐ EMAS /SIEMENS
(PROVIDED THAT AllCIRCUIT EGYPT
6‐ MOLLER GERMANY
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUMENTS AND METERING
MANUFACTURERS
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MANUFACTURERS
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOLID STATE TYPE
MANUFACTURERS
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
MANUFACTURERS
CONTACTORS
MANUFACTURERS
AUTOMATIC REACTIVE POWER
COMPENSATION (POWER FACTOR
CAPACITORS CORRECTION)
ASSEMBLY
MANUFACTURERS
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
1‐ SIEMENS GERMANY
2‐ SCHNEIDER FRANCE
3‐ ABB GERMAN
4‐ TELEMECANIQUE FRANCE
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

MCC PANELS:
(PROVIDED THAT ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS
TO BE IMPORTED)

Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
1‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRICAL EGYPT

2‐ ABB ARAB EGYPT
3‐ ADVANSYS (FOR SCHNEIDER) EGYPT
4‐ PETROKIMA (FOR SICMCNS) EGYPT
5‐ GE POLAND
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES:‐
1‐ DANFOS DENMARK
2‐ ABB FINLAND
3‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRICAL FRANCE
SOFT STARTERS:‐
1‐ ABB FINLAND
2‐ SCHNEIDER ELECTRICAL FRANCE
3‐ EATON U.S.A.
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
FOR DECORATIVE LIGHTING
REFER TO LIGHTING FIXTURES
SCHEDULES
A. LIGHTING
1‐ PHILIPS NETHERLANDS
2‐ GE U.S.A
3‐ RZB GERMANY
4‐ ZUMTOBEL GERMANY
5‐ TECTOR ITALY
6‐ TEC‐ MAR ITALY
7‐ GHIDINI ITALY
8‐ SIDE ITALY
9‐ C LUCE ITALY
10‐ GENEX ITALY
11‐ REGIOLUX ITALY
12‐ IGUZZINI ITALY
13‐ PXF POLAND
OR APPROVED EQUAL
B. DRIVER:‐
1‐ PHILIPS EUROPE
2‐ OSRAM EUROPE
3‐ HELVAR EUROPE
4‐ VOSSLOH SCHWAB EUROPE
5‐ TCI EUROPE
6‐ ELT EUROPE
7‐ TRIDONIC EUROPE
8‐ PHILIPS EUROPE
9‐ OSRAM EUROPE
10‐ HELVAR EUROPE
11‐ VOSSLOH SCHWAB EUROPE
Project No. 20075
MILITARY ACADIMIES
12‐ TCI EUROPE

OR APPROVED EQUAL
EMERGENCY LIGHTING CENTRAL

BATIERY
1‐ COOPER LIGHTING U.K
2‐ OVA Italy
3‐ RZB Germany
OR APPROVED EQUAL
s LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM

1‐ ELECTRO SONIC U.S.A
2‐ JUNG Germany
4‐ ABB Italy
5‐ LEGRAND France
6‐ LUTRON U.S.A
7‐ DYNALITE Austallia
8‐ COOPER U.K

Project No. 20075

Electrical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MILITARY ACADIMIES

NEW ADMINSTRATIVE CAPITAL, EGYPT TABLE OF CONTENTS

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SHAKER Consultancy Group

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. This Section includes the following:

1. General provisions applicable to Division 26 work and other Sections of the

1. Power Service and Distribution consisting of:

a. Low voltage distribution network:

b. Underground ducts and raceways.

SHAKER Consultancy Group

d. Other electrical systems:

1) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS),

e. Vertical Transportation systems consisting of :

1. Incoming LV cables termination to their upstream supplying main distribution

1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

C. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification or on the Drawings in which

1. IEC: The International Electro-Technical Commission.

SHAKER Consultancy Group

1.4 POWER SUPPLY

A. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:

1. Low voltage: 380 V, 3 phase, 5 wire, solidly earthed neutral.

1.5 MOTORS AND OTHER ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT

1.7 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

A. Climatic Conditions at Project’s Site:

1. Altitude: (consultant to add according to the project conditions)

SHAKER Consultancy Group

B. Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental conditions specified

1. Interior Environment: System components installed in non-temperature-controlled

C. All electrical equipment including transformers, LV switchgears, cables, relays, lighting

1. Interior Environment – where installed indoors, according to their application/

SHAKER Consultancy Group

D. Shop and Construction Drawings:

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electrical equipment, as

a. Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades concerned,

SHAKER Consultancy Group

b. Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric, showing

I. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original catalogues

SHAKER Consultancy Group

R. As-Built (Record) Drawings: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit Record Drawings

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with related Standards, specified therein.

B. Installations shall be carried out by qualified personnel.

A. Coordination with Infrastructure Contractor and other involved packages Contractors as

SHAKER Consultancy Group

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

1.12 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and material characteristics

C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment shall be the latest standard product of the

D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the Specification does not

E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally shall be supplied in complete factory assembled

SHAKER Consultancy Group

F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be stored in an approved location,

H. Warranty: Where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.

SHAKER Consultancy Group